Revit Architecture 2008

Metric Tutorials

April 2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . Performing Common Tasks as You Work in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Part 2

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Linking a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Part 3

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 . 112 . 115 . 121 . 126 . 130 . 130 . 133 . 136 . 137 . 140 . 146 . 146 . 149 . 153

Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Contents | v

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 . 160 . 165 . 169 . 172 . 172 . 177 . 179 . 181 . 183 . 189 . 192 . 195 . 195 . 196 . 199 . 204 . 204 . 206 . 206 . 210 . 211 . 215 . 215 . 221 . 223 . 227 . 230 . 231 . 238 . 238 . 244 . 248 . 250 . 252 . 254 . 258 . 259 . 260 . 260 . 262 . 278 . 278 . 283 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292 . 294 . 296

Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . Creating a Component Legend Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

vi | Contents

Working with Revisions . . . . Importing from Other Applications . Importing Image Files . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 297 . 299 . 299 . 300 . 301

Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Part 4

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 . 324 . 327 . 333 . 335 . 337 . 337 . 339 . 340 . 341 . 346 . 346 . 350 . 352 . 355 . 358 . 358 . 360 . 364 . 365 . 367 . 367 . 370 . 372 . 376 . 376 . 377 . 379 . 382 . 382 . 383 . 384 . 384 . 387 . 388 . 388 . 390 . 391 . 394 . 394

Chapter 9 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Contents | vii

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 399 . 401 . 403 . 406 . 406 . 408 . 411 . 411 . 415 . 417 . 420 . 422 . 429 . 429 . 436 . 440

Part 5

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Creating a Daylight Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Part 6

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Creating 3D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a Family . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Origin of a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Priorities for Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Family Parameters and Family Types . . . . Lock geometry to reference planes . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 2D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 . 480 . 481 . 481 . 483 . 484 . 490 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 495 . 496 . 497 . 498 . 503 . 506 . 508 . 511 . 512 . 513 . 519 . 521 . 526 . 538

viii | Contents

Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Complex Model Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening . Modelling a Complex Wall Opening . . . . . . . . . Creating Window Frame Geometry . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Window Sash Parameters . . . . . . . . Defining Visibility Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry . . Creating the Glass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Formulas to Define Width . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Default Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Sill Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Sill Families into the Window Family . . . . Creating a Length Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Sill Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project Environment . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . Appendix A - Exploring Family Templates . . . . . . . . . Model Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Titleblock Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 540 . 545 . 547 . 548 . 551 . 554 . 561 . 565 . 566 . 567 . 570 . 573 . 574 . 574 . 575 . 575 . 577 . 578 . 579 . 580 . 581 . 582 . 583 . 584 . 591 . 594 . 603 . 609 . 612 . 614 . 614 . 616 . 618 . 618 . 618 . 619 . 620 . 621 . 622 . 624 . 626 . 626 . 628 . 628 . 630 . 631 . 631 . 634 . 642 . 644 . 644 . 650 . 653 . 654 . 668 . 669

Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 672 . 673 . 676 . 676 . 682 . 686 . 690 . 693 . 693 . 695 . 698 . 707 . 707 . 708 . 712 . 712 . 716 . 721 . 726 . 728 . 728 . 733 . 735 . 735 . 738 . 738 . 739

Part 7

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 . 744 . 753 . 755 . 755 . 758 . 760 . 764 . 764 . 765 . 768 . 774 . 774 . 778 . 780 . 782 . 785 . 787 . 788 . 789 . 791 . 792 . 793 . 794

Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 20 Area Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

x | Contents

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Chapter 21 Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 . 808 . 813 . 815 . 815 . 816 . 819 . 822 . 822 . 825 . 825 . 828 . 832 . 834 . 837 . 842 . 846 . 846 . 853 . 857 . 859 . 860 . 863 . 866 . 866 . 870 . 870 . 876 . 880 . 882 . 889 . 893 . 895 . 899 . 900 . 904 . 904 . 905 . 913 . 916 . 917 . 921 . 932 . 938 . 939 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 943

Chapter 22 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Chapter 23 Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay . Sketching Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls . . . . Adding Structural Columns and Beams . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams and Girders . . . Adding Joists and Purlins . . . . . . . . . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels . . . Defining New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating the Existing Design . . . . . . Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation . . . . . Creating a Framing Elevation . . . . . . . Adding Structural Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 24 Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

Contents | xi

Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 950 . 950 . 953 . 957 . 961 . 965 . 970 . 970 . 980 . 987

Chapter 26 Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

Chapter 27 Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

Chapter 28 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 . 1003 . 1011 . 1014 . 1017 . 1019 . 1020 . 1021 . 1024 . 1026 . 1027

Part 8

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 . 1034 . 1036 . 1038 . 1039 . 1041 . 1041 . 1045 . 1047 . 1048 . 1053 . 1055 . 1056 . 1059 . 1059 . 1060 . 1064 . 1067 . 1069 . 1071 . 1072 . 1074

Chapter 29 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Architecture templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Architecture is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Architecture 2008?
The Revit Architecture platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Architecture model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Architecture 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Architecture uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Architecture uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■ ■

Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. In Revit Architecture, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit Architecture 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Architecture, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Architecture. Project: In Revit Architecture, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Architecture classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Understanding the Basics | 7

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit Architecture 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Architecture is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

The Title Bar
2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

The Menu Bar
3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

click Toolbar. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and click. and View. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. place the cursor over the menu name. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. While working in the drawing area. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. TIP For example. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. notice a door type is specified. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. Edit.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. On the left side of the Options Bar. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. Then. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. To choose commands. click the command name to start the command. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component.

9 In the Type Selector. if you intend to add a door. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . For example. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. Within the drawing area. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. If you select the Door tool. You use the Type Selector in two ways. First. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. notice the list of walls that are available. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. 11 Click OK.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: includes commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered 3D images ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . immediately below the Type Selector. containing buttons grouped by function. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.

select Views (all). Navigating the User Interface | 13 . sheets. families. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. reports. 3D). families.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for executing conceptual massing commands Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab: includes commands for creating construction industry information To access the commands within a tab. family category (doors. elevations. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. windows). and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. In the Project Browser. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. click the tab. schedules. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and rename views. delete. and group name. walls. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. and groups.

■ ■ To open a view. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. Do not click. The browser is dockable. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After you create a browser organization scheme. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. ■ 13 In the Type Selector. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. double-click the name. click Cancel. click Wall. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet.

notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components.In the bottom left corner of the window. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. In the Status Bar. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. Revit Architecture 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2008 Help. It highlights when the cursor is over it. 18 On the Design Bar. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. 20 Press TAB. The Status Bar also provides information. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. regarding selected components within a view. When you place the cursor over a component. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. in conjunction with Tooltips. click Modify. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. In this case." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar.

3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. Click the Help button. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. If there is no Help button displayed. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. There are several tools that help you find information. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. For example. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view.rvt. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture In this exercise. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. find a keyword on the Index tab. click Training Files. click . press F1 to get help on that dialog box. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. You can also press SHIFT+F1. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. Windows: From any window. You can use this tri-pane. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials.Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open.

5 Click Zoom Out (2x). this is referred to as a crossing selection. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 6 On the View toolbar.The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. 8 Click in the drawing area. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 17 . 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom.

it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. called drag controls. 14 Enter ZR. Similar controls. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. On a wheel mouse. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. roll the wheel to zoom the view. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. and drag the cursor. display along the ends. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. click . To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . To modify or add snap increments. Small blue dots. Without clicking in the dialog. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. click Zoom. expand Views (all). Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Cnst. and select the wall. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and double-click 2nd Flr. on the View toolbar. bottoms. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). referred to as shape handles. expand Floor Plans. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. These are the drag controls. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. press and hold CTRL. When drawing or modifying a building model.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel.

moving the cursor to the left horizontally. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table. and click again to specify the ending position. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. click (Move). Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 19 . to lengthen the wall.15 Click and drag the left control. such as Move and Copy. After selecting the element to be moved. click to specify the starting position. require two clicks to complete the command. Some commands. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. for example. In this case. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. and on the Edit toolbar. you want to move the table closer to the wall.

and drag it on top of the table. as shown. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Select the plant. select the second item in the list. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint.20 Click next to the lower wall. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the drop-down menu next to . you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. 23 On the Undo menu. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Move. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. In this example. The table and plant are returned to their original locations.

stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. click the Undo command. on the Standard toolbar. 26 To end the command. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. Press ESC twice.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. such as the Lines command. click Modify. On the Design Bar. click Lines. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Some commands. 27 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 21 . use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Developing Your Designs 2 23 .

24 | Chapter 2 Developing Your Designs .

If the grid moves. a curtain wall. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2008. 25 . For example. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. the wall or column will move with it. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. As you develop the building design. a central service core. a wall or a column can be constrained to grid.Creating a Building Information Model 2 In this tutorial. it is good practice to test the constraints.

26 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project dataset. such as a door or window. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. from the product library. The project datasets have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. After the beginning exercises. you load any required family type that is not in your project. In practice.

but contains no geometry. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. West. duplicate them. and elevation views created in the project by the template. under Create new. with an RVT extension. 3 Under Template file. and settings. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North.Creating the Project In this exercise. These views are customizable: you can rename them. The project is stored as a single file. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. select Project. South.rte. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. construction. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. locate the Project Browser. To create the project file. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 2 In the New Project dialog. Create the project from the default template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. East. 7 If necessary. notice four elevation markers. 5 Click OK. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. NOTE If you create a project without a template. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. and residential. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. you design inside the elevation markers. expand Floor Plans. schedules. views. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. and Elevations (Building Elevation). The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. Ceiling Plans. and families in your project. expand Views (all). click Training Files. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. and customize the project as necessary. Creating the Project | 27 . verify the second option is selected. change their properties. The new project opens. you will use the default template. and click Browse. and delete them. In views that display elevation markers. you use a template that is provided with the software. reflected ceiling plan views. levels. For this project. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. sheets. In the drawing space in the right pane.

Adding Project Levels In this exercise. 16 Click Save. and click Training Files. Sheets (all). Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. double-click South. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. You can add. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. Families. 15 For Save as type. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. and other properties. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. the view you see in the drawing area. you will want to save your work frequently. Two level lines. double-click Metric. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . As you design and document your building model. enter Revit Retail Building. verify that Level 1 displays as bold.rvt) is selected. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). 13 In the file window. content and building model reports. Groups. created by the template. verify Project Files (*. 14 For File name. view the Save Reminder interval. “Adding Project Levels” on page 28. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). heights. and on the General tab. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. display in the south elevation. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. and duplicate levels. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. will be accessible from the Project Browser. After you modify the two default levels. Schedules/Quantities.8 Under Floor Plans. You change the names of the 2 default levels. as well as change their names. notice the Legends. 10 In the Project Browser. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. delete. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. such as schedules and legends. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. or constrained. and double-click South. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. so that when one level moves. expand Views (all). to each other. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. and press ENTER. the other levels move and change with it. 5 In the Project Browser. enter 00 Foundation. and press ENTER. Adding Project Levels | 29 . 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. enter 0 mm. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. and press ENTER. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. When you begin designing. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).You learn how the levels are locked. and windows within the building model. and press ENTER. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. enter 01 Entry Level. enter -1800 mm. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. doors. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height.

24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed green line displays alignment with the two existing levels. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. you add another level. This is the Options Bar. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. and click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. not all the tabs are visible. and then move it up. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. click Level. and move it slightly upward. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. under Floor Plans. and enter 02 Level. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. If it does not. 18 In the Project Browser. click . click Rename. and for Offset. 19 Click OK. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Level. By default. view the Design Bar. which should display by default. 14 Click Plan View Types. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. As you move the cursor. Next. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level.Next. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. When you add the new level. and press ESC. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. verify Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. right-click Level 3. 16 Enter 3750 mm. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 3750 mm. 23 On the Options Bar. A dashed green line indicates where the new level will be drawn. and click Basics. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. using a different option. verify and Make Plan View are selected. right-click.

as shown. or on the Design Bar. and rename the corresponding views. Adding Project Levels | 31 . Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line.25 Click to place the level line. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. 27 Press ESC. 26 Rename the level 03 Level. If you create a level by copying it. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. click Modify to end the command. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line.

the levels are no longer constrained. the column height changes as well. Move the cursor up. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. and you can move them independently. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. double-click 00 Foundation. On the Design Bar. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. specify a start point for the grid line. so that if the roof elevation changes. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. all the levels move. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. click Modify. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. and specify the grid line endpoint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. “Creating a Column Grid” on page 32. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections.Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. select . 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Create vertical column grid lines 1 On the Project Browser. click Grid. If you select a level and click its lock. Notice that by moving the top level. In the following exercise. under Floor Plans. In a later exercise. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. When the grid is complete. By using the grid to control placement of columns.

and for Offset. and press ENTER. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. enter 4500 mm. enter 7500 mm. for Offset. enter 7500 mm. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. ■ The first vertical grid bay is created. click Grid. On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. for Offset. Click to place the grid line. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 33 . Enter A. click . and click to place the line. Next. and click to place the line. and click to place the line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. On the Options Bar.

click and specify an Offset of 0 mm. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. ■ ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. click Dimension. as shown. 11 On the Design Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Grid. click Grid. Dimension the grid and lock the grid bay spacing 13 On the Design Bar. The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. On the Options Bar. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1.8 Press ESC.

and press ESC. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. until it is closer to grid line 5. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right.14 On the Options Bar. 15 Starting with grid line A. At the left endpoint of the grid line. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. 21 Press ESC. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 18 On the Design Bar. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will ''grow'' out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. click Dimension. until it is closer to grid line A. By pinning these central grid lines. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. The pins are hidden. 22 While pressing CTRL. Two pins display on the grid lines. click Modify. and select grid line A. Creating a Column Grid | 35 . click and drag the blue circular grip up. select grid lines C and 3. 24 Press ESC. and press ESC. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. click .

32 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. For Place By. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. click Activate Dimensions. select all of the column grid lines. click (Grid Intersection). lock it. Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 33 While pressing CTRL. and unlock it. and press ENTER. 40 On the Options Bar. select UC-Universal Column: 305x305x97UC. 34 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. double-click 01 Entry Level.■ If necessary. click Camera. 37 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 31 Press ESC. and specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. click Finish. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 41 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. and on the Options Bar. If it is unlocked. 27 In the Type Selector. 35 Enter 9000 mm. Add columns to the grid 26 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 36 On the Standard toolbar. for From. select 01 Entry Level. click Structural Column. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 38 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. ■ 29 While pressing CTRL. click twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. Next. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 30 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). select grid line A. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. Creating a Column Grid | 37 .■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. and click to place the target point of the camera.

Adding Beams In this exercise.42 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can view all of the columns. In the Rename View dialog. ■ ■ Right-click 3D View 1. enter To Building. 43 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. The current view. and click OK. 44 Save the drawing. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. and then copy them to the subsequent levels. under Views (all). You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. named 3D View 1 by default. and click Rename. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. displays in bold under 3D Views. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . “Adding Beams” on page 38. expand 3D Views.

2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. The selected grid lines display as red. double-click 01 Entry Level. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. 7 On the Options Bar. click Finish. the icon on the right side of the scale. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected.When you finish adding beams. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. Adding Beams | 39 . view the icons on the View Control Bar. The view is currently set to Coarse. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 8 While pressing CTRL. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . 4 Click Medium. click Grid. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Options Bar. click Beam. select each grid line. under 3D Views. 6 In the Type Selector. Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands.

NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. 13 On the Design Bar. press and hold SHIFT. double-click 01 Entry Level. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click Select All Instances. click to view the default 3D view of the structure. 12 On the View toolbar. click Modify. 14 Select one of the beams. right-click. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. which only extend to the 5th level. and click OK. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. When you created the columns. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. under Floor Plans. select 06 Roof.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. select 02 Level. 17 In the Select Levels dialog.

20 Click Cancel. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. and click Element Properties. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. under 3D Views. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. select 06 Roof. view the Top Level Constraint parameter. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. and if necessary. 22 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. click . and click Select All Instances. and click OK. 06 Roof. resize the view to see the entire structure. 21 With the column selected. under Constraints. under Instance Parameters.Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. 24 Press ESC. right-click. for Top Level. All of the columns display as red. Adding Beams | 41 .

and click Hidden line. as lines only. 28 Save the drawing. double-click South. but want to display them in less detail. Click Detail Level. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Elevations. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style.View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. “Adding Braces” on page 43. area. and click Coarse.

you create 8 framing elevation views. and press ESC to end the command. under Floor Plans. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. 4 Select the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.Adding Braces In this exercise. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. To better add the braces to the structure. you add braces to the four corners of the building structure. click Framing Elevation. Adding Braces | 43 . 3 On the Options Bar. double-click the elevation marker arrow. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. verify Attach to Grid is selected.

The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. click Brace. and when the endpoint snap displays. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. 11 Using the same technique. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Use the grips that display on the crop region to adjust both sides of the view.The associated framing elevation view displays. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. but when placed the braces are placed. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. click to specify the start point of the brace. 8 In the Type Selector. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. press ESC. After you add the final brace.

enter 18000 mm. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. and press ENTER. The height of the roof lowers. delete it and redraw it. Adding Braces | 45 . Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height.

20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. click twice to restore the original level heights. under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. as shown in the 3D view below. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. 14 On the Standard toolbar. enter 12000 mm. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). Add brace in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. but this time add them from right to left. 21 Select grid line A. 19 In the Project Browser. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. under Floor Plans. click Activate Dimensions. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. double-click 00 Foundation. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 10000 mm.

double-click South. under 3D Views. and drag it away from the structure. Creating a Foundation | 47 . beams. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 24 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Standard toolbar. and roof height. 29 In the Project Browser. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. lock it. and if necessary. grid size. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. under Elevations. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. 31 Save the drawing. under Floor Plans. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. “Creating a Foundation” on page 47. click 3 times to restore the locked dimension. Test connectivity of the columns. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click 3D.23 In the Project Browser.

48 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. 9 Close the warning dialog. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. under View Depth. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. click Edit. for View Range. expand Families. and click View Properties. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the drawing area. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. double-click 00 Foundation. and press ESC. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). and expand Structural Foundation. In the Element Properties dialog. select Unlimited. and how to load specific families into a project. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900 mm. Click OK twice. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. After you load the pile cap family. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. where you must adjust the view range before you can view them. In the View Range dialog.rfa. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. Verify the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. The foundation pile cap now displays. for Level. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. under Extents. The pile cap has been added in the view. click Training Files. A warning displays.Before you can add the pile caps. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. click Foundation ➤ Isolated.

Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. press ESC. under 3D Views. When the final pile cap is placed. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. and click Create Similar. Creating a Foundation | 49 . 13 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.

NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. under 3D Views. 3 In the Type Selector. View the round hollow columns in the building model. “Changing Structural Member Types” on page 50. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. beams. You load new column. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure.rvt. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. click Modify. and click Select All Instances. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. beam. All of the columns in the building model display as red. right-click. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Design Bar.14 Click File menu ➤ Save. and brace families into the project. 2 Select one of the columns. and braces that you used to create the building structure. click Training Files. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column: 508x12. double-click 3D.5CHS. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you change the types of the columns. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

click Duplicate. enter 75 mm. click Edit/New. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. select M_Round Bar: 25mm. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. Changing Structural Member Types | 51 . Change the brace type 8 On the Design Bar. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. This not the size that you want to use. click . select M_Round Bar: 75 mm. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS203.Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. click . and click OK. for Type. 17 While pressing CTRL. 15 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Design Bar. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. 7 On the Design Bar.9. double-click Elevation 1-a. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 10 On the Options Bar. but it is the only size of its type currently available. 9 In the Type Selector. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75 mm. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. right-click. The brace type changes. the braces as well as the beams change. you change the brace type. In the following steps. and changing its size parameter. 18 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and click OK twice.2x101. and click Select All Instances. for d. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only.6x15. click Modify. select the braces in the elevation one by one. 13 In the Name dialog. enter 75 mm. click Brace. 6 In the Type Selector. under Dimensions.

you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. click Lines. To create floors. under Floor Plans. such as roofs. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building.rvt. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. You are now in the sketch editor. and railings are also created from sketches. click Floor. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. “Adding Floors” on page 52. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. Some other Revit Architecture elements. Adding Floors In this exercise. double-click 01 Entry Level. In this exercise. ■ On the Sketch tab. stairs. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and elements in the current view display as gray.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you must sketch them first in a sketch editor. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

click Dimension. Using a crossing window. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. as you resize it in the next steps. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Do not lock the dimensions. past the first vertical grid line. If the grid changes size. Move the cursor to the left. 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Leave this dimension unlocked.■ ■ On the Options Bar. Do not lock the dimension. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. click . select the top floor line. and then the 1st horizontal grid line. At the top left corner of the grid. and click above the 1st horizontal grid line to place the dimension. Adding Floors | 53 .

using a different sketching technique. select the top floor line. click . 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. click Quit Sketch. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. on the Design Bar. and click the temporary dimension value. press ENTER. If you needed to modify the floor after you created it. click Modify. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. Move the cursor to the right dimension.6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Next. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. and change their values to 300 mm. At the top left corner of the grid. and on the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. 8 Select the floor. Select and lock the dimensions. and then press ESC. Enter 300 mm. this is how you would do it. They display on the floor sketch. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300 mm. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

click Floor. and lock the dimensions. click . 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adding Floors | 55 . The 02 Level floor sketch displays. and move the cursor until the dashed green line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. under Floor Plans. enter 1500mm. and press ESC. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line.Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. double-click 02 Level. Select the three remaining floor lines. click Lines. On the Sketch tab. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. 13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. The 02 Level floor displays. click Finish Sketch. 14 On the Design Bar. and for Offset.

click Floor. under Floor Plans. click Lines. 18 On the Options Bar. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. and a lock icon displays. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Tools toolbar. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate the Align command is active. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Align . double-click 03 Level. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. Click the locks to constrain the floors. click .Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser.

click Edit. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. and lock the edges. double-click {3D}. and unlock it. click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. and click OK. 31 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style. and on the Options Bar. View the floors in the 3D building model and test connectivity 36 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. under Floor Plans. and click Activate Dimensions. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 38 In the Project Browser. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. and click Shading with Edges. double-click 00 Foundation. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. 41 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level.24 On the Design Bar. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floors. 40 Select grid line A. 35 On the Design Bar. 37 On the View Control Bar. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. Alternatively. under Views ➤ 3D Views. Adding Floors | 57 . select 05 Roof Garden. 32 Select the floor. and enter 4500 mm. 39 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B.

42 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 43 On the Standard toolbar. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. “Adding a Roof ” on page 58. under Floor Plans. click to restore the grid bay size to 7500 mm. and lock the dimension that you unlocked in a previous step. under 3D Views. double-click 00 Foundation. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Roof In this exercise. double-click {3D} to view the grid. 44 In the Project Browser. you add a sloped roof over the corner of the building.

click Lines. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Defines Slope. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. enter 1800 mm. When a green dashed line displays. Click . You sketch the footprint. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. ■ ■ For Offset. and specify which roof edges will define the roof slope. 3 On the Design Bar.To create the roof. of the roof in a plan view. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. Adding a Roof | 59 . click Training Files. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. click to place the roof line. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 06 Roof. or the perimeter. under Floor Plans. and press ENTER.

Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 7 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Defines Slope. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown.6 Select grid line 5. click to place the roof line. click (Trim/Extend). and lock it. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line. enter 0 mm. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. and lock it. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. For Offset. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line. ■ 60 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and when the green dashed line displays. 10 Press ESC.

Change the roof slope 16 In the Project Browser. 15 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. Adding a Roof | 61 .12 Optionally. click Finish Roof. for Slope Angle. enter 4. View the roof 14 On the View toolbar. click . place a dimension between the roof slope edges and the grid to constrain them. View the roof 19 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. click .00. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. under Dimensions. double-click 06 Roof. click . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. 17 Select the roof.

Under Vertical Grid Pattern. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Click OK twice. for Spacing. enter 2100 mm. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. select Curtain Wall: Storefront. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ Click . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add a curtain wall. enter 1050 mm. so if you resize the grid. the curtain wall resizes with it. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. When you duplicate a type. click Wall. 3 In the Type Selector. for Spacing. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. “Adding a Curtain Wall” on page 62. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . The type is saved in the project.rvt. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . for Join Condition. Under Construction. 6 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. enter Retail Storefront. and click OK. click Duplicate. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click 01 Entry Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Type.

select 01 Entry Level. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. click to place the 1st curtain wall segment. you can delete the dimension. dimension both corners of the curtain wall to the grid. 10 When a green dashed line displays. and trim each curtain wall segment. select 05 Roof Garden. enter 600 mm. If you want to hide them. If the grid moves.■ ■ ■ For Level. For Height. so they remain in the view. click Dimension. but opt to keep the constraint when prompted. the locks ensure that the curtain wall will move with it. 9 Move the cursor over the grid line 1 near its endpoint. These dimensions are not in a sketch. 13 On the Design Bar. For Offset. and move it slightly toward the building interior. click (Trim/Extend). Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. Adding a Curtain Wall | 63 . and lock the dimensions.

double-click To Building. and click Hidden Line. and click Shading with Edges. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Click Model Graphics Style. under 3D Views. “Creating an Entrance” on page 65. 15 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style.View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Creating an Entrance In this exercise. click All. and click None. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. All the elements in the list are selected. clear one element to clear all the elements. 6 Under Visibility. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To better work with the curtain wall panels. 4 On the Model Categories tab. and click Medium. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. click Training Files. click Detail Level. under the element list.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. 5 Under Visibility. 2 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). Creating an Entrance | 65 . Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click South.

click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. press and hold CTRL. select Architectural Elevation. 9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Select View Template dialog. 10 Select 1 panel. 12 With the panels selected. as these usually represent internal pilasters.Do not select Columns. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. select System Panel: Solid. 7 Click OK. 15 Zoom to the drawing extents. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. in the Type Selector. click Modify. and click OK.

under 3D Views. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. in this case an architectural elevation. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. double-click {3D}. 19 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Creating an Entrance | 67 .16 On the View Control Bar. double-click To Building. you see that the visibility of many of the Model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 17 In the Project Browser. 18 On the View Control Bar. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click South. click Add or Remove Segments. select another mullion to the right. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. and click to select it. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line.20 In the Project Browser. click Curtain Grid. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously.

27 On the Options Bar. 34 On the View toolbar. 30 On the Design Bar. Creating an Entrance | 69 . 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. click . select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. and unpin it. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. and view the new entrance. click Modify. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. select One Segment. 32 In the Type Selector. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion.

70 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and unpin it. press TAB until it is selected. 3rd. 38 Press DELETE. remove the mullions from the 2nd. and 4th panels. select it.36 Zoom in to the first panel. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 39 Using the same process.

and click View Properties. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. 5 Click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. for Underlay. double-click 01 Entry Level.40 Optionally. click Training Files. open the North elevation. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 71 . you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click in the view. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise.rvt. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 02 Level. under Floor Plans. “Creating a Drop Ceiling” on page 71.

select the grip closest to the callout head. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Callout. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. 8 Select the callout. which indicates you must draw the callout. and specify a point to complete the callout. The cursor changes to a pencil.

and click OK. 12 Draw a section line. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 73 . Move the cursor horizontally to the left. ■ ■ Specify the section start point just below the right framing elevation marker. and specify a point past grid line D. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 13 Select the section line. 16 Select the section box. click Section. under Floor Plans. 14 Press ESC. right-click. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. enter Display Area. and click Flip Section. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section.9 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level.

select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600 mm Grid. 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. enter Section Display Area. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. 32 In the Type Selector. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. Click . 25 Press ESC. right-click Section 1. 21 In the Type Selector.17 In the Project Browser. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . click Dimension. select Finish Face: Exterior. 27 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Design Bar. and lock the dimension. 24 On the Tools toolbar. and click OK. click Ceiling. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. under Ceiling Plans. Lock both alignments. and click Rename. 19 In the Project Browser. for Prefer. click Wall. and lock the dimension. select Basic Wall: Interior-135mm Partition (2 hr). under Floor Plans. For Loc Line. click (Align). 33 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Sketch. 30 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm rectangular wall inside the grid lines. expand Sections (Building Section). double-click 01 Entry Level. select Wall faces. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

41 On the Options Bar. double-click Section Display Area. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 75 . 37 On the Design Bar. The ceiling grid displays inside of the walls.■ Click Click . click . 38 In the Project Browser under Sections (Building Section). 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 36 Press ESC. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. . click Finish Sketch. ■ 34 Sketch the ceiling within the walls. and click to select the walls. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. 39 On the View Control Bar.

46 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. On the Options Bar. for Height Offset From Level. enter 2700 mm. and specify a distance. 47 In the Project Browser. click Modify. select any horizontal or vertical ceiling grid line. and click to select the walls. Select the 02 Level Floor. click Move. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click . for Top/Base. 44 Select the ceiling. under Ceiling Plans. select a grid line. and click OK. and click OK. for Base Offset. 48 Modify the ceiling grid: ■ To start the tiles on a wall edge. 43 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. ■ 76 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 2700 mm. on the Tools toolbar. press TAB until you select the wall chain. click Attach. and drag it to the interior face of the horizontal or vertical wall. To position the grid.42 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. under Constraints. 45 In the Element Properties dialog.

view the ceiling structure. for Structure. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. under Construction. 51 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type. click (Rotate). Creating a Drop Ceiling | 77 . Rotate the ceiling grid 56 Select the center ceiling grid line. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. 52 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Cancel. click Cancel. 57 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. 53 Click OK. click Edit.View the ceiling structure 49 Select the ceiling. and click . 58 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid.

enter 45.59 Click. 61 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and press ENTER. 60 Press ESC.

copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 65 Optionally. You begin by creating a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. double-click To Building. “Creating Multi-Level Stairs” on page 79.View the building in 3D with shadows 62 In the Project Browser. Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. click Shadows On. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. 64 On the View Control Bar. 63 On the View Control Bar. After the stairs and stairwell have been copied to levels 01-05. 66 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. you must cut an opening through the floors on each level. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 79 . and then copying it to the 05 Level. click Shadows Off.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the area defined by grid lines B. under Floor Plans. ■ 80 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . You will create the stair in the area between these columns. click Ref Plane. click to specify the start point of the reference plane. 5 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor over the intersection of grid lines C and 3. click Training Files. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. double-click 01 Entry Level. Move the cursor vertically. In the left pane of the Open dialog. C. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair_. When the temporary dimensions indicate the cursor is 1500 mm from the grid line intersection. 3 On the View Control Bar. Move the cursor to the left along grid line 3. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. 2. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and 3. and specify the reference plane endpoint on grid line B.

and specify a point to create first stair flight. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 81 . click Stairs.■ Draw another reference plane 1500 mm from grid line 2. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining.

■ 12 Draw walls around the stair. Click . 14 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. and click to select it. and specify a point.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. including its handrails. The complete stair displays. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. 15 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall.225mm Masonry. 10 In the Type Selector. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. click Align. select Finish Face: Interior. Move the cursor down. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 16 Using the same technique. click Wall. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. select Basic Wall: Generic . with a message that 20 risers have been created and that 0 remain. 8 On the Options Bar. beyond the end of the stair. and lock the alignment. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and select the 2nd reference plane. 9 On the Design Bar.

select the dimension value. 23 While pressing CTRL. 22 On the Standard toolbar. 19 Select the dimension. click Dimension. Click Modify. Select the bottom of the stair. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. The stair and walls move to the left. select Wall faces. Select the wall.17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select both reference planes. Select the interior face of the wall. 18 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Lock the dimension. click . and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. a warning displays. for Prefer. enter 1200 mm. and press DELETE. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 83 . 21 Select the stair. Because the dimension is constrained. and press DELETE. 20 Click OK to delete the dimension. and specify a point away from the wall. and press ENTER.

select all 4 walls. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. TIP To flip the door swing. click . 31 Select the stair. Click OK. but if you view the top level of the building. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. 29 While pressing CTRL. 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Click OK.Add a door to the stairwell 24 On the Design Bar. for Base Constraint. 26 On the Options Bar. verify Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. and click . 28 On the Design Bar. For Top Constraint. press and hold the left mouse button. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the left corner of your screen. . select 05 Roof Garden. 25 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select 00 Foundation. 35 Press SHIFT. and click 30 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 27 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. and move the cursor to spin the building model. for Multistory Top Level. 33 On the View toolbar. Under Constraints. click Door. click 34 On the View toolbar. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. clear Tag on Placement. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs.

double-click 01 Entry Level. 37 Zoom in to the stairs. and lock the alignments. Copy the door to multiple levels 46 Select the door. ■ 40 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs.Create a shaft opening 36 In the Project Browser. 41 On the Tools toolbar. 47 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 45 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 44 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 43 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. and lock the alignment. 42 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. 48 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Floor Plans. click Align. 38 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. . Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 85 . 39 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click .

select Up to Level: 06 Roof. enter 300 mm. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. ■ For Top Constraint.49 In the Select Levels dialog. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. under Floor Plans. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. click 51 On the View toolbar. click 56 On the View toolbar. 52 In the Project Browser. 53 Select the shaft. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. and click OK. click . 55 On the View toolbar. and spin the building so you can see the roof. for Base Offset. click . . By offsetting the base. Under Constraints. . double-click 01 Entry Level. 57 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. View the shaft and stair 50 On the View toolbar.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Training Files. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 87 .58 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof Level. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. “Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height” on page 87.rvt.

and press ENTER. select Basic Wall: Generic . Select the wall. and draw a 10650 mm wall along grid line 3. 7 Move the cursor near the column at the intersection of grid lines C and 3.225mm Masonry. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and click View Properties. 10 Change the dimension value: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar.Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. select Core Face: Interior. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. click Wall. 2 Right-click in the view. Enter 1050 mm. select 06 Roof. 6 On the Options Bar. for Underlay. 9 Dimension the space between grid line C and the left face of the wall on grid line 3. and click OK. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select the dimension value. for Loc Line. click Dimension. under Graphics.

12 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. click Edit Profile. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 89 . 13 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 15 Select the wall.11 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. 23 Press ESC. and click to place a line. 22 Move the cursor horizontally 1520 mm to the left. Modify the profile of the wall 14 On the Design Bar. and click to place a line. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Go To View dialog. The South elevation displays. and click to place a line. move the cursor up 4500 mm. click (Align). 18 Select the top endpoint of the left vertical profile line. click Lines. and then select the right face of the wall. 21 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical profile line. The profile of the wall that you just modified displays as a purple sketch. 19 Press ESC. 20 On the Design Bar. move the cursor up 6000 mm. double-click Elevation: South. click Modify.

26 Snap to the endpoint of the line that you just drew. snap to the top of the circle. 28 On the Design Bar. and click (Circle). 31 Move the cursor to the left. Select the top right portion of the circle. click . 27 Press ESC. Select the short right profile line. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and select the endpoint of the left vertical profile line. 30 Using the Quadrant snap. Select the top horizontal profile line. click the drop-down arrow that displays next to the sketching tools. 25 On the Options Bar. Select the top right portion of the circle. click Lines. click (Trim/Extend). and select it. 32 Click Modify. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1520 mm displays. Press ESC. and click to place it. 29 On the Options Bar. 33 Trim the profile lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click Lines.24 On the Design Bar.

41 Select the horizontal line across the middle of the profile sketch. click . click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar. click the Close button. and click to place it. click Finish Sketch. 42 On the Design Bar. 48 Change the 06 Roof level height to 19000 mm. By adding extra height to the wall. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1000 mm displays. and select the wall. 43 In the Warning dialog. instead of lengthening the existing edge. click Lines. 38 On the Design Bar.34 On the Design Bar. You need a closed sketch to complete the profile. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 91 . 44 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Error dialog. note that for Top Constraint. click Finish Sketch. and press DELETE. 36 Snap to the endpoint of the short horizontal line. under Constraints. 47 Click Cancel. select the short horizontal line on the right. click Modify. 37 On the Design Bar. click . and press DELETE. you maintained the relationship to the roof level. click Modify. 45 On the Options Bar. unlock it. 40 On the Design Bar. click Continue. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. Up to level: 06 Roof is selected.

You learn how to load these components into the project. you place planters on the 05 Roof level to create a roof garden. and how to place and adjust them in project views. double-click 3D. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. click to restore the original height of the roof. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. View the wall 50 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. “Adding Entourage and Site Components” on page 92.49 On the Standard toolbar. 51 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 52 Proceed to the next exercise.

TIP After you place the 1st planter.rvt. click Training Files. between grid lines C and D. Create the roof garden 1 On the Project Browser. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 93 . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. under Floor Plans. as shown. select M_Planter : 1200 x 1200mm. click Component. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Type Selector. and open Metric\m_RRB_host.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed green line that helps you to place the next planter. double-click 05 Roof Garden.

for Plant Height. double-click {3D}. click Component. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. double-click 01 Entry Level. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. and then click OK twice. and in the Type Selector. select Tree . under Other. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click . and on the Options Bar. enter Cornus Florida 1. and press ESC. select the 2 remaining trees. and click OK.5.5 Meters.5 Meters.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 1. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. 19 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 20 In the Project Browser.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 4. 18 While pressing CTRL. 17 Click Apply. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans.5 On the Basics tab. for Type. under Floor Plans. click . 8 On the View toolbar. 11 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. 15 In the Name dialog. enter 1500 mm. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 View the roof. 6 In the Type Selector. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. select M_Tree . 12 Select 1 of the trees. double-click 05 Roof Garden. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof.

click Floor. 28 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. 25 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 27 On the Options Bar. and click to sketch a line. click Lines. and click to place the line. for Offset. and click to sketch a line. 29 Select the right vertical floor line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 95 .21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ For Offset. 26 Using the same method. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 22 On the Design Bar. enter 2400 mm. 24 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. enter 0 mm. 23 On the Options Bar: Click .

38 On the Design Bar. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. click . The completed sidewalk displays. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 32 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. and click to finish the line. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 35 Select the line that you just drew. click Finish Sketch.30 On the Options Bar. move the cursor up 900 mm. clear Chain. 34 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). 96 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to finish the line. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor.

enter -250 mm. for Type.Next. 43 Click OK twice. 52 Move the cursor toward the column. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 In the Type Selector. and specify a point to rotate him so he is facing the column. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 45 Click OK. for Height Offset from Level. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. click Component. 53 In the Type Selector. 49 On the Options Bar. as it is currently a floor element. The circle is divided in half by a line. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. under Constraints. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. enter Sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 97 . near Column E5. click Edit/New. select M_RPC Male: Alex. 42 In the Name dialog. and on the Options Bar. click Duplicate. select Rotate after placement. 39 Select the sidewalk. click . and second line inside the circle indicates the person’s line of sight. In plan view. 51 Move the cursor so the rotation line displays along Alex’s line of sight and specify a point. RPC people are represented by a circle. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. create a new type for the sidewalk element.

and click . you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. 56 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 55 In the Type Selector. 58 On the View tab of the Design Bar.54 Rotate Cathy so she is facing Alex. 57 Press ESC. click Pick Host. click the car. 59 In the camera view (3D View 1). and click OK. 61 In the Project Browser. click Camera. 64 Select Cathy. for Offset. double-click West. Next. 60 In the Element Properties dialog. under Elevations. under Constraints. 63 Select and drag both Cathy and Alex above the sidewalk. 62 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. and on the Options Bar. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. When you select a host for a component. enter -300 mm. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . select M_RPC Beetle.

both Cathy and Alex will move with it. and replace them with a service core.65 Click the sidewalk. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. under 3D Views. 66 Select Alex. 67 Click the sidewalk. double-click To Building. “Linking a Service Core to the Building Project” on page 99. If the sidewalk changes height. 69 Using the same method. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. and on the Options Bar. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. 71 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 99 . View the front of the building 70 In the Project Browser. 68 Select and move both Cathy and Alex until they are standing on the sidewalk. click Pick Host.

The service core is contained in an external file that you link to your current project. click Training Files. By deleting the stairwell from the 06 Roof. click 5 On the View toolbar. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 On the Project Browser. double-click 06 Roof. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_host_style_railings. 100 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. so it will cut through the floors of the building. 4 On the View toolbar. you must cut another shaft opening around it. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. After the service core is linked to your project. and spin the building. including the stairs. and press DELETE. under Floor Plans.rvt. and shaft opening. you delete the entire stairwell. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. 3 Select the entire stairwell. . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . walls. press SHIFT.

rvt. double-click 01 Entry Level. The building service core displays in your drawing. 14 Select the top horizontal floor line. Select Cursor at center. under Positioning: ■ ■ Select Manually place. You cannot constrain elements in the current project to elements in linked models. 10 At the bottom of the dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. Do not click the lock to constrain the core and floor. 12 Specify a point to place it between grid lines B-D. 8 In the left pane of the Add Link dialog. 13 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). select m_RRB_link. under Floor Plans. and then select the top horizontal core wall.Link a new service core into the building model 6 In the Project Browser. 11 Click Open. 9 In the Metric folder. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 101 . click Training Files.

Click OK. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. enter 300 mm. select Chain. click 24 On the View toolbar. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click . 16 On the Design Bar. 21 Select the shaft opening and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select Up to level: 06 Roof. Under Constraints. click Finish Sketch. 18 On the Options Bar. For Top Constraint. View the service core in the building model 23 On the View toolbar. for Base Offset. click . click Lines.Create a shaft opening for the service core 15 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 19 Trace the outer edges of the core elements to sketch the service core as shown: 20 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. The rendering displays. expand Renderings. and double-click Lounge Perspective. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. you add glass railings around the floor edges. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. “Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings” on page 103. You can see that the service core cuts through the floors of the building. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. click Training Files. 25 Proceed to the final exercise. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 103 . 3 In the new project. and spin the building to get a better view of the core. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building.rvt.rvt. click Training Files. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. press SHIFT. where it is hosted within a railing family. After you modify it. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. in the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Conference.

7 Click Window menu ➤ Revit Retail Building. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. click Edit. Modify the 02 Level floor 11 In the Project Browser. and Parapet. click (Split). and expand Railings. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. under Floor Plans. 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. click OK. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. 5 Expand Railing. press and hold CTRL. Handrail only. The floor sketch displays. and click to split the floor. double-click 02 Level.rvt or m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. 10 Close the warning dialog that displays.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser.rvt. and select Glass. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. 12 Select the floor. expand Families. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

23 Complete the sketch as shown. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. click Lines. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 105 . click . 27 On the Tools toolbar. and click to draw another line. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. click (Align). and click the lock to lock the alignment. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 25 Select grid line B. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. and click the lock to lock the alignment. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. and click to place it. 20 Move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm and click to draw another line.18 On the Design Bar. 26 Select grid line D. and lock the alignment. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long.

33 On the Design Bar. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. click Dimension.rvt project. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. For Offset. 31 In the Revit dialog. click Railing Properties. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. enter 100 mm. click Dimension. select Glass. 37 On the Design Bar. for Type. Lock the dimensions. and click OK. click Finish Sketch.29 On the Design Bar. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click Railing. 106 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 34 In the Element Properties dialog.

Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 107 . View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown.39 Click Finish Sketch. A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. click Camera. Click Model Graphics ➤ Shading with Edges. You can view the railing that you just added. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics ➤ Hidden Line.

■ Click Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region to hide the frame around the view. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 43 Close all project drawings.

Documenting Your Projects 3 In this section of the tutorials. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. exterior fire stairs. lofty ceilings. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. balconies. and a roof garden. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2008. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. 109 .

NOTE For training purposes. slight modifications to the building design have been made. 110 | Chapter 3 Documenting Your Projects .

and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 111 . including plan.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 3 In this tutorial. section. elevation. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views.

112 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you learn how to create views from a building model. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.Creating Views In this lesson. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. You learn how to create new views from existing views. how to create section and elevation views. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views.

Duplicating Plan Views | 113 . double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 7 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. expand Floor Plans. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click OK. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 2 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan.rvt.

Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Project Browser. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. Next. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 14 On the View Control Bar. 11 Under Floor Plans. and click 1: 1000. 114 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Vicinity Plan. click the current scale. double-click Vicinity Plan. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker.

and click Hide in view ➤ Category.rvt. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 115 .16 Right-click. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.

3 In the Type Selector. 116 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 4 On the Options Bar.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. double-click Level 1. select1:100. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. click Elevation. for Scale. select Elevation: Building Elevation.rvt.

click Modify. click Modify. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. under Elevations. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 117 . double-click South East. enter South East. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 11 In the Project Browser. Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser.

under Views (all). ■ Move the cursor down. 15 On the Options Bar. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 118 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. and double-click Level 1. for Scale. 14 In the Type Selector. select Section: Building Section. expand Floor Plans. click Section.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. select 1:100.

and click to place it. click Split Segment.18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 119 . Click the midpoint of the section line. drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 120 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 24 Select gridline F.21 On the Design Bar. 23 On the View Control Bar. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Modify. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. expand Sections (Building Section). and double-click Section 1.

you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Callout Views | 121 . you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view . Creating Callout Views In this exercise. To create each view.rvt.25 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.

Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. 122 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select 1:50. click Modify. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. click Callout. and specify a point to complete the callout. for Scale. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan. and select the callout boundary.

■ Select the middle grip. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. click Modify. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. and click OK. Creating Callout Views | 123 . 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 9 In the Rename View dialog. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 7 On the Design Bar.

■ Move the cursor diagonally down. select 1:50. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. 124 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Section 1. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. click Callout. and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. select Detail View: Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. under Sections (Building Sections). 13 In the Type Selector.

and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. under Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Callout Views | 125 . Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. expand Detail Views (Details). 17 In the Project Browser. enter Roof Overhang Detail.

Existing stair callout head and boundary 126 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. You change the appearance of the section mark head. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. the elevation markers. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.

select the current project. and click OK. and can be applied to the section line. and click Open. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. select the section line. scroll to Section Line.rvt. click Duplicate. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Section Tail . select Section Head . and click OK. enter Section Head – Custom. select Custom-Section Head. . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. for Section Head. 15 Under Category. 8 In the Name dialog. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 127 . Section Tail – Filled. click Load into Project. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. click Training Files. clear any others. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. double-click Level 1. open Metric\Families\Annotations. under Floor Plans. and click OK twice. click the Annotation Objects tab. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. 12 For Section Tag. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New.Custom. 10 On the floor plan. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rfa.Filled.

Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. and click OK. For Line Weight. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. for Elevation Tag. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. notice the square elevation markers that display. and on the Options Bar. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. select 12. 27 Click OK twice. and select 3.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.5mm Square. and select 2. . and click Open. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. select Square. enter 12. On the floor plan. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. select Custom-Callout Head. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. select 3. and click OK. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Edit/New. 128 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .5 mm. 19 Click OK. open Metric\Families\Annotations. 22 In the Name dialog. For Dimensions ➤ Width. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. Click OK. 17 Under Category. click Training Files. click Duplicate. On the floor plan. 30 On the Design Bar. scroll to Section Marks. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select the current project.5mm Square. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Type Properties dialog.rfa. click Load into Project. enter 12. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. clear all others.

and select 4. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 129 . Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. select . 34 In the Name dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. 45 For Line Pattern. 36 In the drawing. select Dash. click Edit/New. and select 7. click Duplicate. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. select the callout. 40 Press ESC. Click OK. scroll down to Callout Boundary. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. and on the Options Bar. for Callout Tag. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 49 Click OK. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan.33 In the Type Properties dialog. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. For Corner Radius. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 39 Click OK twice. . 46 Under Category. 43 Under Category. enter 6 mm. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. enter . expand Callout Boundary. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.

and features blue triangular grips and break marks. view regions. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 130 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Elevations. View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view.rvt. You learn to create view templates. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. The crop region displays as red. Creating a View Template In this exercise. and apply it to multiple elevation views. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. To accomplish this. and visual overrides. filters. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and double-click East. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. masking regions. In the left pane of the Open dialog.50 Click File menu ➤ Save.

10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Elevations. right-click East. under Visibility. clear Entourage. 6 On the Project Browser. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 8 Click OK. clear Crop Region Visible. click Zoom to Fit. 13 Under Visibility. under Extents. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 On the View Toolbar. and click Properties.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 131 . click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black.

18 In the View Templates dialog. 20 In the Project Browser. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. grids. levels. click OK. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. right-click East. and section lines are now hidden in the view. under Elevations. right-click North. and click Apply View Template. and click OK. 17 In the New View Template dialog. 132 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Callouts. click Apply. 15 On the View Control bar.14 Click OK. and click Create View Template From View. double-click North. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 19 In the Project Browser. elevation markers. under Elevations. 16 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. and click OK.

Click OK twice. under Extents.rvt. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. Under View Depth. for Bottom. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for View Range. select Penthouse. click Edit.rvt. and click Properties. select Level Below (Level 4). 2 In the Project Browser. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. double-click Penthouse. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. select Level Below (Level 4). and the exterior area on the south side of the building. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. for Level. right-click. under Floor Plans. View Range and Plan Regions | 133 . 3 In the Element Properties dialog. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser.

select Roof Plan. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. for Level. right-click. select Level 4. double-click Roof Plan. Under View Depth. under Extents. click Edit. 134 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Level 4. Click OK twice. 6 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. for View Range. and click Properties. for Bottom. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser.

for Level. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. select Unlimited. 13 On the Design Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). 11 On the Options Bar. Click OK twice. 10 On the Design Bar. View Range and Plan Regions | 135 . click Edit. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Lines. 17 On the Design Bar. In the left corner of the building. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. under Extents. select Unlimited. for Bottom. 16 On the Design Bar. Move you cursor diagonally. click Modify. click Region Property. Under View Depth. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. for View Range. click Finish Sketch. click Plan Region.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

under Views (all). enter Rated Walls. click (New). 7 In the Filters dialog. expand Floor Plans.rvt. and click OK. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 5 In the Filters dialog.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Walls. 1 In the Project Browser. click the Filters tab. under Categories. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 136 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Edit/New. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. and double-click Level 1. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. After you apply the filter. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. under Filters. in this case. the fire rating of the walls. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Fire Rating.

Enter Hr. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. 10 On the Filter tab. and click OK. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 12 On the Filter tab. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Pattern. for Rated Walls. for Color. and click OK. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. under Projection/Surface. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. click Add. click OK. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click No Override. 17 Using the same method. select Solid Fill. click Remove.■ ■ Select contains. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. 11 Select Rated Walls. under Basic colors. 16 Click OK. click Override under Patterns. select the red color. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking Portions of a View | 137 . and click OK. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. To accomplish this. 14 In the Color dialog. 9 Click OK.

1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click Show Crop Region. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 138 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . as shown. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 5 On the View menu.rvt. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 4 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. right-click. and click Rename. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left.

7 On the View menu. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. select Invisible lines. click (Rectangle). 9 On the View Control Bar. Masking Portions of a View | 139 . 8 Select the crop region. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 11 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Options Bar. click Masking Region.

Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. right-click Unit 18 Plan . You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. 140 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .14 On the Design Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.

and click Override. right-click. for Pattern. 11 Click OK twice. click No Override. select Walls. and click 1: 50. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. Working with Visual Overrides | 141 . right-click. for Color. and click OK. under Pattern Overrides. and click Rename. 7 Under Cut. click in the Patterns field. under Visibility. 4 On the View Control Bar. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click the current scale. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. click black. select Solid fill. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

clear Grids. 16 Under Visibility. 142 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. 12 On the Design Bar.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Modify. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. clear Floors. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility.

18 Right-click. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 143 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category.

click By Category Override. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. select a bright green color. By using the previous method to make the selection. 23 In the Color dialog. click Projection Lines. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. under Lines. click No Override. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. select Dash. select the sofa. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 144 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .20 Right-click. for Pattern. for Color. click Override. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 21 Under Projection/Surface. 25 Click OK twice. click a purple color. right-click. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 29 In the Color dialog. and click OK twice. and click OK. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 28 For Color.

click . The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click Modify.30 On the Design Bar. right-click. 32 Select one of the lamps. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. Working with Visual Overrides | 145 . The hidden crop region is also revealed. click . 33 On the View Control Bar. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar.

rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. 146 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. how to add views to the sheets.Creating Sheets. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project.34 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View. click Sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. select A0 metric. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. right-click. and click OK.

NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. click Modify. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 .A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. For Sheet Number. 3 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). on the Options Bar.Unnamed. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. 5 When the title block highlights. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. and select the title block. expand Sheets (all). enter Site Plan. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. Creating Drawing Sheets | 147 . enter A101.

148 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . For Project Status. 14 Click OK. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. enter For Approval. 7 On the Design Bar. For Project Name. For Project Number. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. for Project Address. under Other. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Smith.■ Click OK. enter 2007-1. click Edit. The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. enter J. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. click Modify. enter 15 May. MA 12345 12 Click OK. For Client Name. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. enter Freighthouse Flats. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 2007.

and click OK. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all).Elevations A107 . Adding Views to Sheets | 149 . select the new sheet name.Layout Plan A104 . and click OK.rvt. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click A102 . and click Rename. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter Floor Plan.Elevations A105 . right-click. click Modify. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. select Level 1.Sections A108 . 17 In the Project Browser. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.Stairs In the following exercise. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. for Name. select A0 metric. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .Elevations A106 . under Floor Plans. and drag it to the sheet. you add views to these sheets. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.rvt. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.Floor Plan. and click Save.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and click to place the view. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.

7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. double-click A104 . and click to place it. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). 6 In the Project Browser. align it with the East elevation. 150 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Elevations. under Elevations (Building Elevation).The red border around the view no longer displays.

Sections. 12 On the Design Bar. select 1:5.Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. double-click A107 . . drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and click to place it. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click OK. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Select title bar. Adding Views to Sheets | 151 . click Modify. under Sheets (all). and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. for View Scale. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. and on the Options Bar.

Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. zoom in to the grip. and press TAB until it highlights. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. move the cursor over it. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 152 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click to place it. double-click Level 1. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. double-click A108 . under Floor Plans.NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. under Sheets (all). 18 Under Floor Plans.Stairs.

rvt. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. and then make changes and deactivate the view. you must first activate the view on the sheet.Sections. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. double-click A107 . under Sheets (all). you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 153 .22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. In order to do this.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. and click Deactivate View. right-click. and click Activate View.2 Select the building section view. 6 Right-click. 154 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click North. 7 In the Project Browser. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. 5 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. enter 16700 mm. click Modify. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save.

double-click Level 1. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. After you create the sheet. For Sheet Name. under Floor Plans. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. select the new sheet name. and click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. enter T. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. right-click. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 155 . 7 Place the camera as shown. Click OK. The camera view displays. You modify the view to hide the view title. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select A0 metric. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise.rvt. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the Project Browser. click Camera. enter Title Sheet.

11 On the View Control Bar. enter 18000 mm. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . select Far Clip Active.Title Sheet. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. for Eye Elevation. enter100000 mm. Under Camera.8 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. Under Extents. 156 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter 1500 mm. For Target Elevation. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. under Sheets (all). drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. Click OK. 12 On the View Control Bar. For Far Clip Offset. double-click T . and click to place it in the center of the sheet. 14 Under 3D Views.

enter 635 mm. click Size.15 With the view selected. . select Scale (locked proportions). 24 Click OK twice. 19 Select the view on the sheet. on the Options Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. Under Model Crop Size. 25 On the Design Bar. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. under Graphics. click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog. Click Apply. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. for Show title. for Height. select No. enter Viewport/no title mark. click Edit/New. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 157 . and then click OK. click Modify.

158 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file.

in your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. such as room and window schedules. 159 . You also learn to create different types of schedules.Tagging and Scheduling 4 In this tutorial. such as doors and windows.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. click Room Separation.Tagging Objects In this lesson. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Because of the open style floor plan. right-click in the Design Bar. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. 160 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.Level 1. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. and click Room and Area.rvt. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise.

as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 161 . as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). move the cursor to the right.

click Load. 162 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 In the Tags dialog. 9 In the Tags dialog. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. verify that Tag on placement is selected. click Room. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Modify. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The room tag number displays in blue.rfa.7 On the Design Bar. click OK. indicating that it can be edited. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. and click to place the room and tag. and select the room tag. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. click Training Files. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 15 On the Design Bar.

17 Click the room text label. 18 On the Design Bar. enter U18-1. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. enter Entry. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. Click to place the new room and tag. click Modify. click it. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 163 . click Room. 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar.16 Zoom in on the tag number.

Sequential letters are also supported. 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. 20 On the Design Bar. enter Kitchen. click Modify. Dining. 21 Click the room text label. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. 164 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. and press ENTER.

You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. and click OK. Model Categories tab. Tagging Doors and Windows | 165 .Level 2. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair).rvt. click Room Tag. Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 26 On the Design Bar. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. expand Lines. 28 On the Design Bar. and moving clockwise. under Floor Plans. in the Project Browser. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. The rooms are already placed. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.Level 1. clear Room Separation. you learn how to place door and window tags. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. but they need to be tagged.

3 On the Options Bar. click (Properties). click Tag ➤ By Category. enter U18-2. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. and on the Options Bar. and click OK.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. for Mark. 166 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . enter U18-1. under Identify Data. and press ENTER.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. select Door Tags. Tagging Doors and Windows | 167 . and drag it down to center it in the doorway.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. click Tag All Not Tagged. double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 2. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. 13 On the Design Bar. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. under Category.

21 Click OK. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Level 1.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. select Window. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Load. click Training Files.rfa. click Tag All Not Tagged. expand Floor Plans. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Tags dialog. and click OK. 168 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. click Training Files. 27 On the Design Bar. you learn how to tag furniture objects. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Leader. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Tag All Not Tagged. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. double-click Level 2. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Tagging Other Objects | 169 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing.rfa. 25 Under Floor Plans. 28 Select Window Tags. 26 On the View toolbar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category. 5 At the confirmation prompt.Level 1. Zoom flyout. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and modify the tag placement and display. 4 Select a dining room chair.

and drag it above the chair tag. 170 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 13 Optionally. 14 Click Modify. 11 Select the tag for the table. 9 Click Modify. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. and on the Options Bar.8 Select the furniture in the living room. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). clear Leader. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 12 Click the elbow control. and drag it up to form an angled leader.

and click OK. click (Filter Selection). click Tag All Not Tagged. 18 On the Design Bar.Level 2. 20 On the Options Bar. select M_Furniture tag : Standard. and on the Design Bar. Tagging Other Objects | 171 . under Floor Plans. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. click Modify. double-click Unit 18 Plan .16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table.

Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. click Check None.21 In the Filter dialog. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. and click Modify. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. you learn to add schedules. 22 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 172 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. select Furniture Tags.

that is. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. Finally.rvt. in which windows are listed by window type. Next. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. click Training Files. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Creating a Window Schedule | 173 . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a schedule that lists every window in the building.

order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 174 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 3 In the New Schedule dialog. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. right-click in the Design Bar. 7 Using the same method. 9 Click OK. 6 Under Available fields. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Windows. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. click the Fields tab. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. select Comments and click Add. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 4 For Name. and double-click Level 1. enter Building Window Schedule. and click View.

for Sorting/Grouping. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. for Sort by. in large building models with many views. right-click the schedule. under Other. Creating a Window Schedule | 175 . you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. select Type Mark. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Project Browser. NOTE By clicking Show. click Show. However. and click OK twice.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. click Edit. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. expand Schedules/Quantities. and on the Options Bar. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. you are prompted to open one that does. this can be a time-consuming process. click Close. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. If no open view shows the selected element. and click View Properties.

as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. sorted by type mark. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. The window type schedule is displayed. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. under Floor Plans. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. clear Itemize every instance. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. click Edit. and press ENTER. 176 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . for Sorting/Grouping. 22 Click OK twice. and click View Properties. double-click Level 2. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted.The window schedule is displayed. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other.

and sill conditions for a window can be found. you cannot use them to tag objects. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. enter Head Detail. click Add to create the new parameter. select Construction. Under Parameter Data. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 177 . jamb. click OK. For Group parameter under. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. select Type. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. unlike shared parameters. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. For Discipline. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rvt. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. and double-click Building Window Schedule. for Name.rvt. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. expand Schedules/Quantities. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. 5 Click OK. In this case.

select the following fields. 178 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. click Group. 14 On the Options Bar. and click Properties. enter Window Details. and while pressing the left mouse button. and Sill Detail. so that they are listed before Comments. for Fields. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Building Window Schedule. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. TIP To select all 3 headers. under Other. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. Jamb Detail. click Edit. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Head Detail. under Available fields.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. click in the Head Detail header. 12 Click OK twice.

and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. You then hide the column used for the filter. Verify Schedule building components is selected. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Under Name. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise.Door Schedule. select the following fields. Select contains in the second field. Verify the Phase is Phase 1. for Head Detail. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. enter Unit 18 . and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans.Level 1. click Schedule/Quantities. select Doors. enter 1/A107. 4 Click OK. 6 Under Available fields.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. for Jamb Detail. Enter U18 in the third field. enter 2/A107. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. click the Fields tab. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 179 . you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. enter 3/A107. under Type Mark A. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. and for Sill Detail. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans.rvt. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For example. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. but is not included as a column in the schedule. 180 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 9 Click the Formatting tab. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). select Family and Type. and click OK. 13 In the Project Browser. select Hidden Field. and double-click A102 . 15 On the Design Bar. click Unit 18 . 11 Under Field formatting. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.Unit 18. select Mark. expand Sheets (all). click Modify. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. 10 Under Fields.Door Schedule.

Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. under Available fields. and click View. and click Add. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. under Category. under Floor Plans. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 8 Click OK. Creating a Room Schedule | 181 . Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Number. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. select Rooms. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial.rvt. right-click in the Design Bar. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. 5 Using the same method. double-click Level 1. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. 19 On the Design Bar. 7 To the right of Header text. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.

and press ENTER. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. For 105. For 104. select Storage. 182 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . For 103. select Corridor. and press ENTER. The room Number is U17-9. For 102.NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. enter Storage. click New. 11 Using the same method. add 5 more rooms. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. enter Corridor. enter Building Entry. 10 Edit the number to be 101. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. for Name. 101-106. and press ENTER. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. next to Rows. for room 101.

You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. expand Lines. and click OK. click the bright green swatch. you add room separation lines. and click OK. under Projection/Surface. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. In the Line Graphics dialog. click the Color field. double-click Level 1. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. For Weight.rvt. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and modify room names. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Under Custom colors. click Override. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. select 9. place rooms from a program list. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. enter Stair. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. For Room Separation. In the Lines field. click the Lines field. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 183 . 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser.■ For 106. under Floor Plans. and press ENTER. click Room Separation.

Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. draw the horizontal line. click Modify. click Room. 184 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar. First. 8 On the Design Bar.

12 On the Options Bar. enter 2400 mm. select 102 Storage.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 13 For Offset. for Room. select 101 Building Entry. 10 On the Options Bar. for Room. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 185 . 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right).

These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. 16 On the Design Bar. double-click Room Schedule. 18 In the Project Browser. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. under Schedules/Quantities. under Floor Plans. click Modify. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. 186 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click Level 1. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule.14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. and zoom in to the Corridor.

click New to add a new row. 23 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. and click OK. click (Properties). and for all 3 finishes. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Available fields. click Modify. under Constraints. double-click Room Schedule. Floor Finish. 29 On the Options Bar. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). click Schedule/Quantities.19 While pressing CTRL. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 30 For Key Name. clear Room Bounding. enter As Selected. and Wall Finish. under Category. while pressing CTRL. select Rooms. 22 On the Design Bar. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 187 . Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. select Base Finish. and click Add. and click OK. enter Units. 26 Select Schedule keys.

36 In the Project Browser. 188 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . for Fields. right-click Room Schedule.31 Using the same method. 39 On the View toolbar. click (Filter Selection). 37 Under U17-8. and click OK. 42 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. 41 On the Options Bar. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. click Zoom To Fit. click Edit. double-click Room Schedule. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. under Other. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. under Floor Plans. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. select Rooms. Zoom flyout. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. for Available fields. under Schedules/Quantities. select Units. 35 Click OK twice. double-click Level 1. click Room Style. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Room Style. and click Add. 32 In the Project Browser. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser.

you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). select Service. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Color Scheme field. and click OK. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. and apply it to the Level 1 view. and click OK. For rooms 102 and 105. click OK. 103. double-click Room Schedule. select Public. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 189 . enter Room Type. select Room Style. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined.rvt. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 104. at the warning prompt. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Floor Plans. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Level 1. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. 45 In the Project Browser. 6 For Color.43 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. and click Properties. click (Duplicate). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select Units. for Name. click (Properties). and double-click Level 1. select Room Type. under Identity Data. and 106. 5 For Title. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. under Schedules/Quantities. under Views (all). Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 8 Click OK. enter Room Type. for Room Style. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 9 In the Project Browser.

click Edit Color Scheme. and clear Room Separation. click Color Scheme Legend. click Edit. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 22 In the Color dialog. and click OK twice. click the value in the Color column. 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). 16 On the Design Bar. 190 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select the color legend.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and click OK. select blue. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. 18 On the Options Bar. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. click Modify. expand Lines. clear Visible. select Foreground. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). for Display Color Fill in. under Custom color.

27 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. for Size. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 191 .23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. enter 25 mm. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. 24 Click OK. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 5 mm. click Edit/New. under Graphics. (Properties). on the Options Bar. for Swatch Width. 28 Under Title Text.

you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. double-click {3D}. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. click Modify. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.rvt. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 192 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . under 3D Views. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates.29 On the Design Bar.

9 Using the same method.EPDM. Select Grand totals. and click OK. click Family and Type.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select Calculate totals. click Modify. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Under Field formatting. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . For Then by. select Roofs. select Material: Area. 11 Click the Formatting tab. 12 Click OK.3 While pressing CTRL. Clear Itemize every instance. select Material: Description. 5 On the Design Bar. select Family and Type. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. under Category. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. 4 In the Type Selector. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. under Available fields. Creating a Material Takeoff | 193 . 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. and click Add.

enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. and click OK twice. 21 Click the Formatting tab. under Available fields.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. select Calculate totals. click Material: Cost. 17 Click Calculated Value. 23 In the Material Takeoff. and click Add. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click Estimated Cost. and click Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 For Formula. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 22 For Field formatting. enter Estimated Cost.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. and click Properties.80 5. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated. 20 Click OK.40 50. and under Fields. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. for the Material: Cost field. for Name. for Fields. 194 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 24 In the Project Browser. under Other. click Edit.

27 Click Field Format. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 195 . you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. tag the line. For Rounding. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. click Training Files.25 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. and schedule the total distance of each path. click Estimated Cost.rvt. In this lesson. You draw a travel path line. select Fixed. 28 Click OK 3 times. either within family components or within the project template. creating a generic tag to tag the family. select 2 decimal places. adding the shared parameters to a family. and are defined and stored in an external file. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. ensuring consistency across families and projects. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For Units. click Edit. and reporting the shared parameters. regardless of category. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. These shared parameters can be added to any family. under Fields. you create a shared parameter file. you create an exiting plan for the building. for Formatting. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default.

click New. under Groups. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.txt. enter Travel Distance.rvt. and click OK. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 11 Click OK. under Floor Plans. click New. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Length. enter Path ID. for Name. for Type of Parameter. 9 Under Parameters. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. click New. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 7 Under Parameters. and click OK.rvt. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click Save. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. enter Exiting.1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for File name. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for Name. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. click Create. for Name. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Training Files. and click OK. 196 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.

enter Length. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 197 . 4 In the Family Types dialog.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Select Instance. under Parameters. select Constraints. for Travel Distance Formula. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 13 On the Design Bar.rfa. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. under Parameters. and click OK. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Click Training Files. under Dimensions. 12 Click Apply. click Add.rvt. click Load into Projects. 7 For Group parameter under. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. and select Instance. select Shared parameter. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click Select. 9 In the Family Types dialog. If you have multiple projects open. and click OK. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. group it under Dimensions. click Family Types. 3 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 11 In the Family Types dialog. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. in the Load into Projects dialog. 14 If necessary. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. click Add. otherwise the family loads into the current project. and click OK. following the equals symbol (=). 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. click Label. 19 On the Design Bar. 17 Select Generic Tag. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog.rft.rft. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click Label. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. click Select. 24 On the Design Bar. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. click Training Files. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK 3 times. 26 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Travel Distance. and click Open. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. under Parameters. 198 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click Add.

Tagging. enter M_Travel Distance Tag. and press DELETE. Placing. and click Save. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. 31 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. 30 In the Save As dialog. After the lines are tagged. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. Placing. and move it down. double-click Exiting Plan .rfa. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog. select Path ID. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise.rvt is selected.Level 1. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window. and click OK. 29 Click File ➤ Save As. for File Name. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 199 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. under Floor Plans.Tagging. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance.27 In the drawing window.rvt.

5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. click Component. 200 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 6 Move the cursor to the right. above the exterior door as shown. 4 On the Options Bar.2 Zoom in to the corridor. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click in the center of the corridor. select Chain.

16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.Level 2. and click outside of the building. verify that Chain is selected. 17 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double click Exiting Plan . under Constraints. under Floor Plans. 13 While pressing CTRL. 8 On the Design Bar.7 Move the cursor down. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 201 . Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. click Component. 12 On the Design Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. enter 1-1. 10 On the Options Bar. for Path ID.Tagging. Placing. and click (Properties). and click OK. through the door.

move the cursor to the left.18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. 19 Move the cursor up through the door. 20 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 22 Click at the center starting point. and click. move the cursor near the right corner. click Component. and click above the door to the stair. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 202 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

and click OK. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. Placing. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. under Constraints. (Properties). click Modify. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. under Category. and click in the stair. for Path ID.Tagging. enter Level 1 Exit Distance.23 Move the cursor down. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 203 . Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. enter 2-1. and click OK. 28 While pressing CTRL. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. 33 For Name. 27 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

46 In the Project Browser. and click Add. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. in the third field. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 43 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. and click OK twice. right-click the Design Bar. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 44 In the Project Browser. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. click Training Files. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Calculate Totals. and click Rename. and click View. click Edit. for Filter by. enter 1-. 40 Click the Formatting tab. and click Properties. 42 Click OK.rvt. 45 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. click Schedule/Quantities. under Other. select contains. 41 Under Fields. while pressing CTRL. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 35 Click the Filter tab. and in the third field. select Path ID and Travel Distance. enter 2-. select Travel Distance. 204 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . in the second field. in the first field. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Schedules/Quantities. 38 For Sort by. and under Field formatting. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. for Filter. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. select Path ID. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. 36 For Filter by. under Available fields. select Path ID. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise.

click the Value field. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. expand C .Interiors\C10 . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. right-click Generic .Partitions . expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. click C1010145 . and click the browse button.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. and click OK twice. 4 Under Available fields.Fixed Partitions. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. click the Fields tab. for Assembly Code. select Walls. select the following fields. and click Properties.152 mm.2 In the New Schedules dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 205 .Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 . under Categories.

5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. select a location for the database file. click the File Data Source tab. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise.rvt. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). under Database. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. and click Next. and open the database in Microsoft Access. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the New Database dialog. Additionally. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 9 Under Directories. under Database Name. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. and click Next. 6 Click Finish. and click OK to create the database. click Create. 10 Close the exercise file. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. 3 Click New. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click OK in the dialog. 10 When the confirmation displays. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog.mdb for Database Name. enter Revit_Project. click Training Files. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. 1 On the File menu. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click OK. 206 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .9 In the schedule. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs.

This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. 13 Close the exercise file. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. For example. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 207 . as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. in addition to the Id column. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in.

208 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 209 .Annotating and Dimensioning 5 In this tutorial.

You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 210 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project.

click Training Files. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Relocating a Project In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. Relocating a Project | 211 . and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

for Elevation Base. 8 Select the Level 1 line. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated.Shared Elevation. expand Views (all). click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. However. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. select Shared. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. click Edit/New. In the Name dialog. enter8 mm Head . you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. By entering 10000 mm in this step. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. The south elevation is displayed. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. 212 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. you specify the new location of the project. Under Constraints. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. 10 On the View menu. 6 Click OK twice. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. The levels in the project are not shared. enter 10000 mm. and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. If you did that now. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click (Properties). 4 In the Element Properties dialog. By selecting the Level 1 line. and press ENTER. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. and click OK.

The changes in elevation have propagated to this view.Shared Elevation. click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Design Bar. as well as other views of the building model. select Level : 8 mm Head .Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. double-click North. under Elevations. 12 In the Type Selector. Relocating a Project | 213 .

and select Levels 2-4. On the Design Bar. click Modify. 214 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. select Level : 8 mm Head . In the Type Selector. and the Roof Plan level. the Penthouse level.Shared Elevation.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL.

and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. click File menu ➤ Save As. Dimensioning In this lesson. and double-click Level 1.16 If you want to save your changes. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. radial. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. In Revit Architecture. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. “Dimensioning” on page 215. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. permanent dimensions are created automatically. and angular dimensions. expand Floor Plans. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. You place linear. In this case. expand Views (all). Dimensioning | 215 . you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. multi-segmented. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building.

and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. 216 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . dimensions are aligned. snap to wall centerlines. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. By default. select it. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. select it.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and are created by selecting individual reference points. click Dimension.

The lock displays as locked. Creating Dimensions | 217 . and click to place the dimension.5 Move the cursor above the view. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. click Dimension. click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar.

but below the first dimension that you placed. 12 13 On the Options Bar. select the right side of the curtain wall. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. and select it. and select its left exterior face. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 11 Using the same method. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. select Wall Faces. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. select the right endpoint of the planter. 15 Move the cursor to the right. above the plan view of the building. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. for Prefer.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. 17 Move the cursor up. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 218 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .

23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. and specify a point to place the dimension. For Prefer. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). click Dimension. click Modify. and select it. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. 26 Select the radial dimension. Creating Dimensions | 219 . 21 On the Design Bar. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. click Modify.19 On the Basics tab. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Wall faces.

verify Wall faces is selected. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). click Dimension. click (Properties). For Prefer. and click OK. 220 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 34 Select the horizontal line.28 With the dimension still selected. on the Options Bar. 30 On the Basics tab.. enter Typ. Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. for Suffix. click Modify.

35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. and click to place the dimension. click Modify. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. 37 On the Basics tab. you select only the wall. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 221 . “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 221. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. When you dimension the wall. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc.

expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). and select Widths. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. select Entire Walls. For Pick. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Click OK. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. Click Options.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 222 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. click Dimension. select Wall centerlines. select Openings.

expand Floor Plans. in some cases. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. Controlling Witness Lines | 223 . where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. However. and double-click Level 1. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 On the Basics tab. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 223. When you place dimensions. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. for a multi-segmented dimension. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. and click to place the automatic dimension string. click Modify. expand Views (all). you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. For example.

verify Wall centerlines is selected. 7 Using the same method. select Individual References.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor down. 224 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. and click to place the dimension. For Pick. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. and select it. click Dimension. select the right edge of the planter. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

and select it. and specify a point to place the dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. select the bottom right endpoint. Controlling Witness Lines | 225 . 10 Using the same method.8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 11 Move the cursor down.

and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 Press and hold SHIFT. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. and drag the dimension down the wall. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. click Dimension. for Prefer. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. select Wall centerlines. click Modify. and when the wall centerline highlights. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. 226 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . select it. and click to place the dimension.

you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 227 . select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. 23 Proceed to the next exercise.19 Release SHIFT. and using the same methods. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. 20 Release SHIFT. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 227. 22 On the Basics tab. click Modify. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. After you create the new family type. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise.

rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. for Tick Mark. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. For Text Font. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 5 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.2 mm. 228 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click OK. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.dimension tick mark. select Arrow 30 Degree. enter Office Standard. enter 3. click Duplicate. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Text. 2 Click (Properties). text font. for Text Size. and select the lower dimension. select CityBlueprint.

and select the bottom dimension.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. select another font. 10 On the Basics tab. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 229 . select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 9 In the Type Selector. ■ Click OK twice. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. click Modify. 7 On the Basics tab. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. click Modify.

select the angular dimension on the planter. and how to add leaders to the text notes. 230 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 230. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building.11 Using the same method. create a new angular dimension type. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes.

you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. zoom to planter near grid line 5. but below the upper dimension string. for Leader. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click (None). Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 231 . click Text. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. and click and drag to create a text box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

select Arc Leaders. for Text Size. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Select the text box. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. and click . If so. enter EXISTING BUILDING.5 In the text box. enter 6 mm Arial Notes. under Graphics. enter 6 mm. click Modify. and click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. 11 Under Text. 232 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click OK. click Duplicate. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. click Edit/New.

click Modify.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. click Text. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). and enter Planting Bed. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 233 .

24 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. select CityBlueprint. for Leader Arrowhead. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. enter Standard Notes. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. Under Graphics. select Arrow 30 Degree. for New. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Click OK twice. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. 20 On the Design Bar. In the Rename dialog. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. Click Rename.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Text. for Text font. click Modify. and click OK. click Modify. 234 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .

click to place the text box. select Text: Standard Notes. click Text. 27 On the Options Bar.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. over the Planting Bed text. click (Arc). Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 235 . for Leader. 26 In the Type Selector. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right.

31 Click in the text box. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and enter 457 mm Conc. click File menu ➤ Save As. Wall. 236 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and save the exercise file with a unique name. 32 If you want to save your changes.

These components display at the required scale. 237 . and metal studs. like a standard door header condition. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model.Detailing 6 In this tutorial. plywood. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2008.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. In the callout view. you detail the view of the roof edge. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. Detailing the View In this exercise. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. They are also view specific. add detail components.rvt. 238 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and insulation objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. region objects. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. click Training Files. you trace over the building model geometry. as well as detail lines. which means that all detail components. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. After you add components. In order to detail from the building model. You load detail components.

click Edit/New. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. click Detail Component. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. 10 On the Options Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. Exact location is not important. and click OK. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click Duplicate.rfa. 17 In the drawing area.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. 8 Delete the component. select Corrugated Metal. enter 406. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. double-click the detail callout head. 7 In the drawing area. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. click . 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 For Spacing. 16 Click OK twice. select As underlay. click Training Files. and click Open. The roof overhang detail displays.5mm. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. click Repeating Detail. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Detailing the View | 239 . 5 In the alert dialog.

21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. click Load. click (Move). ■ Click Modify. Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. 240 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 19 On the Design Bar. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. click Detail Component. click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.

and place it in the detail view as shown. 32 To properly orient the component. Because you still have several components to load. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 31 In the Type Selector. 25 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. Detailing the View | 241 . select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. and click Open.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood.rvt. click Training Files. press SPACEBAR 3 times. click Detail Component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.rfa. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 34 In the Type Selector. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. you load them as a group from a single file. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.

38 Click Modify. 37 Place the wallboard component as shown. 36 On the Options Bar.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. select Chain. click the Flip instance arrows. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. 39 Select the horizontal segment. click Insulation. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. and click Modify. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 242 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

■ Click Modify. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. and on the Edit toolbar.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. enter 140mm. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. click (Move). Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. 46 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. For Offset. select to near side. click Detail Component. as shown. Detailing the View | 243 . 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 43 Click Modify. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point.

Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed.48 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. they are view specific. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Detail Lines. and lock the component. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. Like detail components. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 244. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector. you add lines to your detail.rvt. 244 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 4 Click Modify. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. as shown. meaning they display only in this view. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 52 Click Modify.

For Offset. as shown. and press ENTER. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. 11 In the Type Selector. 7 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. click Detail Lines. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Medium Lines. 10 On the Design Bar. as shown. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Adding Detail Lines | 245 . Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. select Thin Lines.Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. For Offset. enter 10mm. enter 10mm. and press ENTER.

18 In the Type Selector.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. draw the detail lines as shown. and draw the detail lines as shown. select Thin Lines. click (Draw). 16 On the Options Bar. select Chain. and clear Chain. as shown. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. 246 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Detail Lines | 247 . click Detail Lines. and click Properties. and press ENTER. 22 In the Project Browser. 24 On the View Control Bar. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. select the Penthouse level line. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. select Vapor Barrier. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. right-click Roof Overhang Detail.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. When you turn the display model off. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 26 In the Type Selector. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click. enter 10mm. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. select Do not display. for Graphics ➤ Display Model.

select M_Break Line. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. click Text. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. press SPACEBAR as necessary. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 30 In the Type Selector.29 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Detail Component. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you add text notes to complete the detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 248 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 32 Click Modify. “Adding Text Notes” on page 248.

and click (Properties). Enter the text. enter Typ. 7 Select the dimension line.. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. and click OK. 6 Click Modify. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. click (Arc) to create an arced leader. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. for Text ➤ Suffix. click Dimension. Adding Text Notes | 249 .2 On the Options Bar.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and press DELETE. pressing TAB. right-click. and save the exercise file. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. right-click. right-click. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. click 6 In the Filter dialog. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. click Roof Overhang Detail. select a text note.Keynotes. 250 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Roof Overhang Detail . and click Rename.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. select all the coping linework. click Select All Instances. and selecting the chain. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.rvt. “Creating Detail Components” on page 250. and click OK. (Filter Selection). you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. and click OK. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. while pressing CTRL. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. 7 Click Modify. on the Options Bar.

in the Type Selector. navigate to your preferred location. click . 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click OK. While pressing SHIFT. click Detail Component. 21 To place the component. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 22 Click Modify. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. 18 In the Save As dialog. 14 Click Modify. clear Detail Items. 15 Use a window to select all linework. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. enter Roof Edge. select Medium Lines. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 24 On the Options Bar. 16 Click Modify.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click Open. select the coping. click Load into Projects. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Keynotes view is not the open view. for File name. and the component can be placed in the detail. 25 In the Filter dialog. click Training Files. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. The original linework remains selected.rft. double-click it in the Project Browser. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 23 Using a window. and click Save. Creating Detail Components | 251 . click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping.

delete the underlying linework. 27 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Detail Component. and click Open. click Keynote ➤ Element. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 Using the same method used previously. 252 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Training Files.26 Press DELETE. 63mm Rigid Insulation.rfa. and click Open. Click to place the leader arm. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them.B5. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the alert dialog. 30 In the drawing area. In the Keynotes dialog. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.rfa. click Load. and click OK. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 28 On the Options Bar. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. “Adding Keynotes” on page 252. you place keynotes on objects. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. click Training Files.

use keynote 06110.F1. navigate to 07645. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 06110. Roof Edge4.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties).C1. use keynote 09250. click in the Value column.D1. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard.G1. click Keynote ➤ Element. 19mm Plywood. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. use keynote 06160. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.I1. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 12 On the Design Bar.D11. 6 Click Modify.F1. use keynote 06110. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. use keynote 07645. Adding Keynotes | 253 . For the 50 x 150. For the 50 x 200. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. For the metal coping. use keynote 06160.D11. 11 Click OK 3 times. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. FasciaProfile_1. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. select the metal fascia with drip edge.

17 Keynote the component. for File name. and click Modify. select Medium Lines.rft. select Corrugated Metal. 22mm Corrugated Steel . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 Lock the line.14 On the Design Bar. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click Open. click Lines. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. and select the right end point.20 Ga. navigate to your preferred location. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As.A8. 9 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 254.rvt. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. and click Save. click Load into Projects. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 5 In the drawing area. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. 8 In the Save As dialog. select the left end point of the reference line. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 4 In the Type Selector. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 254 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 15 In the Type Selector. You do this in order to keynote the component. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. click Detail Component. using keynote 07460. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. 18 Save the file.

Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. click Detail Component. 30 Click Modify. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 28 In the Type Selector. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 255 . navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 16 Select the component. 15 Click Modify. 34 In the Name dialog. 20 Click OK 3 times. and hidden) used in the view. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 24 While pressing CTRL.A1. 29 In the drawing area. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. click Training Files. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. click Detail Component.11 Press DELETE. click Edit/New. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. click Detail Component. click in the Value column. 19 In the Name dialog. invisible. click Edit/New. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 27 On the Design Bar. enter EPDM Membrane. 31 Select the component. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. click the end points at the top of the roof. 25 Next. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 22 On the Options Bar. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. click Load. You add the components to the project and keynote them. and click Open. 13 In the Type Selector. select Medium Line Detail Component. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 37 Click OK 3 times. and click . Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Duplicate. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click (Properties).

click Detail Component. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. (Move).A5. click Detail Component. on the Edit toolbar. 46 Click Modify. 49 With the component selected. and click .38 On the Design Bar. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 256 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 47 Select the component. 48 Using the same method used previously. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 53 On the Options Bar. and click . 41 Select the component just added. 52 In the Type Selector. 40 Click Modify. select Chain. 44 On the Design Bar. against the 3/4" plywood. Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar.G1. and assign it keynote 06110. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. and click the lower end at the break line. and assign it keynote 07260. name the component Air Barrier. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. click Detail Component. 42 Using the same method used previously.

57 Select the vertical hidden line component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 257 . 61 In the drawing area. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. name the component Vapor Barrier.A4. 58 Using the method used previously. and click .55 Click Modify. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. click Keynote ➤ Element. and Vapor Barrier. Air Barrier. 50 x 200 Framing. leaving the detail component lines. and assign it keynote 07260. 60 On the Design Bar. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines.

you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit..A4. click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. The database file opens in a text editor. 3 In the text editor.A1. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. select Invisible Lines. 67 In the drawing area.rfa. Enter 07460. 69 Using the method used previously. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and close the text editor. click Load into Projects. 72 Proceed to the next exercise. add a keynote for the component. and press ENTER. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 258. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Component. 258 | Chapter 6 Detailing . select the component. and press TAB. and click . 70 In the drawing area. and press TAB. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. in the Type Selector. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.txt. 71 Save the file. and assign it keynote 07210.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. name the component Batt Insul. 68 Select the component. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing.rvt. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Enter 07463.rfa. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.A9. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 63 In the drawing area.

select all the keynotes. you learn how to create a drafted detail. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. and click to place the note. and click OK. navigate to 07463. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture.txt. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. click Keynote ➤ Element. Creating a Drafted Detail | 259 . under Keynote Table. 13 Click Modify. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.A1. In the Type Selector. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 9 In the drawing area. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 11 Click Modify. and click Open. click Browse. 14 Save the file. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. select Absolute. click to place the leader. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. After you create a drafting view. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. Each keynote displays as a simple number. under Path Type. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. and click OK.

Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. and click OK. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 6 In the Project Browser. for Scale. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Rename. select 1 : 5. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 260. 3 On the Options Bar. select Black and white. select Reference other view. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The detail that you import is in DWG format. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. right-click Drafting 1. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Click Open.dwg. click Callout. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and click OK.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. 260 | Chapter 6 Detailing . For Layer/Level Colors.rvt. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. select Center-to-center. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.rvt. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. click Training Files.

and click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.No Reference. click Edit/New. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. and click Properties. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. enter Detail . Creating a Reference Callout | 261 . delete the existing value. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Click OK twice. for New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 6 Select the callout. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. and double-click the callout. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Rename dialog. 5 Click Modify. click Rename.

Elev. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 18 Save the file./Det. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 19 Proceed to the next exercise./Sect. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. “Creating a Detail in a Drafting View” on page 262 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. The callout is updated with the sheet information. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. enter Header @ Sliding Door. double-click A105 . for Name. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. and click OK. 3 On the View Control Bar.No Reference). There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 262 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 263 . 18 While pressing CTRL. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. . Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 5 In the Type Selector. select Wide Lines. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. select the left and bottom edges of the region. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. and enter 20. for Name. click . 14 Click OK 3 times.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Edit/New. 16 Select the left edge of the region. click Duplicate. click Filled Region. click Detail Component. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. Draw a rectangle as shown. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Click Modify. and click OK. Board. 19 In the Type Selector. enter Gyp. select Gypsum-Plaster. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Name dialog. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. select the width dimension.5mm. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

and click above the top of the region as the end point.20 On the Design Bar. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click 22 On the Options Bar. (Draw). and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. Move the cursor up. click Finish Sketch. Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. 24 Select the mirrored region. and on the Edit toolbar. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). 264 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Finish Sketch. for Name. click (Align). 29 In the Type Properties dialog. in the Type Selector. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.Finish. 30 In the Name dialog. verify that the thickness is 19mm. Draw a rectangle as shown. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. and click OK.25 Click Modify. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 37 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 265 . click .Finish. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. select Wood . and select the right edge of the wood region. click Region Properties. . 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. click Filled Region. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click Duplicate. 33 Click OK 3 times. enter Wood . select Medium Lines.

select Medium Lines. 266 | Chapter 6 Detailing . For Offset. 40 On the Options Bar.38 On the Design Bar.5mm. click Ref Plane. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. click Filled Region. click Finish Sketch. sketch the new region as shown. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 39 In the Type Selector. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. enter 6mm. click . click (Align). and press ENTER. 42 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Tools toolbar. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick). 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region.

and press ENTER. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. and press ENTER. enter 10mm. click (Trim/Extend). 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw). and click to select the point. Move the cursor right 25mm. 48 Click Modify. click Filled Region. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. Select Chain. For Offset. and click to select the point. 54 On the Tools toolbar. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. enter 0. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 267 . and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. Move the cursor down 305mm. 56 On the Design Bar.47 Click the reference plane. Move the cursor left 25mm. and click to select the point. click Finish Sketch. and select the bottom horizontal line.

enter 76. 65 On the Options Bar.Add mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. For Offset. 62 Select the left detail line. enter 3mm. select the height dimension. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 63 Repeat for the right detail line.rfa. 61 Click Modify. top. and press ENTER. and right edges of the door panel region. click Detail Component. 58 In the Type Selector. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. click Detail Lines. click Training Files. select Medium Lines. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).2mm. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. and click Open. and press ENTER. 60 Select the left. click Load. 268 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

71 On the Options Bar. select Wide Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 269 . navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. use the images as a guide. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 68 Click Modify. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150.TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.rfa. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. click Load. click Detail Lines. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. and click Open. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 69 Select the bolt. click Training Files. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Detail Component. 76 In the Type Selector. 70 On the Design Bar. 74 Select the expansion bolt.

click Detail Lines. 79 In the Type Selector. 82 Select the rectangle. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 80 On the Options Bar.78 On the Design Bar. click . 85 On the Options Bar. (Mirror). 270 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. select Thin Lines. and on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Lines. click . click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 84 On the Design Bar.

91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. click Detail Lines. 89 On the Design Bar. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 90 In the Type Selector.87 Click Modify. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 271 . select Medium Lines. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. as shown. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.

and on the Edit toolbar. click . 272 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. 94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 95 On the Design Bar. and click to place the arc as shown. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. select the length dimension. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. click (Mirror). enter 3mm.92 Select the line. 97 On the Options Bar.

and click Modify. 102 In the Type Selector. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 105 In the drawing area.99 Click Modify. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 106 Click to place the dimension. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Dimension. Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 101 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 273 . select M_Break Line. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.

using the Drag Text grip. 110 Select the dimension line. click to create an arced leader. select the gypsum board region on the left.107 On the Design Bar. Add text notes to complete the detail 111 On the Design Bar. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. 108 In the Type Selector. 116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. and click to place the text. Board. and click Modify. click Text. 274 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 115 Select the note. drag the text for the smaller dimension. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 112 In the Options Bar. click Dimension. 114 Enter Gyp. and on the Options Bar. and click Modify. 113 In the drawing area.5mm Arial.

118 On the Design Bar.117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 275 . 119 Save the file. click Modify to end the command.

276 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

including: ■ ■ Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications. such as images and text into project sheets ■ ■ ■ 277 . you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation.Finishing the Sheets 7 In this tutorial.

and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote .rfa. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Hexagon. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. for Number of Leaders. and double-click East. click Training Files. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Symbol.Using Note Blocks In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. 278 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .Finishing-Sheets. enter 1. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family.rvt. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.

9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. on the Options Bar. 13 Select the tag. 12 On the Edit toolbar. Creating a Note Block | 279 . under Identity Data. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Seal existing doors and insulate. click (Properties). and click OK. and click above the tag to place a copy. click (Copy). for Text.

15 For Text. and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. click (Properties). click (Mirror). clear Copy. as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 20 Select the tag on the left. 16 For Tag. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. and on the Options Bar. and click. on the Options Bar. 17 Click OK. enter B.14 With the copy selected. 280 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 19 On the toolbar. enter Repair existing door surround.

Remove all existing windows. select Tag. Clean cut and repair wall as required. 22 Optionally. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Repair existing door surround. Clean exterior brick wall. and moving counter-clockwise. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. format. Creating a Note Block | 281 . Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.21 On the Design Bar. and click Add. enter Exterior Construction Notes. under Available fields. select Tag. for Sort by. Select Text. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Tuckpoint as required. and click OK. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Create. click Modify. for Note block name. and click Add. Saw cut existing brick wall. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. using the table as a reference. Repair as required.

282 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . verify Arial in the first field. On the Appearance tab. 29 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). and click Save.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. expand Schedules/Quantities. 26 Click OK. For Header text. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. for Heading. enter Mark. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. click Modify.Elevations. select Exterior Construction Notes. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. enter Description. enter 6 mm in the second field. and double-click A103 .rvt. and select Bold. 27 In the column header (text). 28 In the Project Browser. 31 On the Design Bar. select Center. and drag it to the sheet. and for Alignment. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. select Sheet Index. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. ■ 4 Click OK. under Sheets (all). and click Add. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Sort by. enter Sheet Index. in the first field. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click Add.Title Sheet.rvt. 7 In the Project Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. double-click T . Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. 5 In the list title field. The drawing list displays. select Sheet Number. and in the third field. and drag it to the sheet. double-click T . select Sheet Number.Title Sheet. under Available fields. in the second field. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. for Filter by.Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. under Sheets (all). select Sheet Number. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. On the Filter tab. enter T. Using Drawing Lists | 283 . Select Sheet Name. select does not equal.

Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. 284 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. 9 On the Design Bar.rvt. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. and click OK. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click New ➤ Legend. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Finally. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. click Modify. enter Typical Symbol Legend. and door frames. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. doors. for Name.8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner. On construction documents. door frame schedule. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. On construction documents. windows. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. and so on).

click . for Name. Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 13 Working from the top down. and click OK. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote .Filled Level Head . Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. click Duplicate. select Arial. enter 3mm. click Text. and click OK twice. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. you create a text type with the necessary size. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Creating a Symbol Legend | 285 . enter Legend Text. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 10 For Text Size. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note.Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options bar. click Symbol. 9 For Text Font.

double-click A102 . The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 15 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Selector. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 286 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. expand Legends. select Viewport : No Titlemark. click Typical Symbol Legend. 19 In the Project Browser.Unit 18.Site Plan/Floor Plan. and double-click A101 .■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. click Typical Symbol Legend. under Sheets. and click to place it. and click to place it. 17 On the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all).

click Modify. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. Creating a Component Legend | 287 . 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select1 : 50. enter 900 mm. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet.20 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 21 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 On the View Control Bar. click New ➤ Legend. For Host length. for Name. click Legend Component. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. and press ENTER. and click OK. select Medium for Detail Level.rvt. For View. select Section. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 3 For Scale. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall.

select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. for Family. and on the Options Bar. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.9 On the Design Bar. click Text. 288 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 12 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 10 Select the second wall.

17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. The text note with leader is added to the legend. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. Creating a Component Legend | 289 . 19 Enter the following text. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. click to add text without a leader. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider.13 On the Options Bar. click to add text with a single-segment leader. for Leader. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line.

double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. under Legends. drag it onto the sheet. 29 In the project Browser. under Floor Plans. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select 4th Floor Wall Types. 290 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all). and click New Sheet. 26 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Floor Plans. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. The open drawings are both visible. select Level 4. 23 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the new sheet. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. double-click Level 4.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser.

Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 33 In the floor plan view. The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. click (Match Type). Creating a Component Legend | 291 . 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. select the Wall Type 2 component. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region.

Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. 37 Optionally. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. 292 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. contractor inquiries.35 Select the patio divider wall. You can create a sequence of revisions. 36 On the View Control Bar. These changes can be due to owner requests. select Medium for Detail Level. 38 Click File menu ➤ Save.

verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. If you select By Sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click Level 4. For example. Using the table. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. In general. In most instances.unanticipated changes in construction conditions. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Revisions dialog. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. 7 Under Visible. enter a date. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. the revision is locked and issued to the field. Setting Up a Revision Table | 293 . click Revisions. yet as concise as possible. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. If Visible is not selected. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. or changes in building material availability. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.rvt. When Issued is selected. 5 For Description. under Floor Plans. When you use this option. if the active revision is number 1. In this exercise. 2 On the Settings menu. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. revision descriptions should be comprehensive.

Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. you make changes to the project floor plan. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. including revision number and revision date. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Revision clouds have read-only properties. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. 3 Select the divider. move the cursor up. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 294 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .rvt. 5 Select the partition. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. click (Move). and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. double-click Level 4. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans.8 Click OK. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud.

Sketching Revision Clouds | 295 . click Finish Sketch. click near the partition you moved.6 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 8 In the drawing area. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. click Revision Cloud. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click Modify. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

select 6. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 16 Click OK. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. double-click Level 4. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. you load a revision tag into the project. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud.rvt. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. 296 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . click Tag ➤ By Category. for Line Weight. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you prevent further changes to the revision. You then issue a revision. select Leader. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. You do this by issuing the revision. the cloud is tagged as number 1. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock.Unnamed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. In the Tags dialog. 8 In the Tags dialog. click OK. click Training Files. you create a sheet view in your project. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 6 Click Load. 5 In the Tags dialog. you create additional revisions in the revision table.rfa. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save.4 On the Options Bar. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. and because the revision is the first in the project. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left.rvt. double-click A107 . Because you chose to number by project. Working with Revisions In this exercise. click Tags. Working with Revisions | 297 . under Sheets. 11 Click to place the tag. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. 10 In the drawing area. scroll down to Revision Clouds. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. on which you place a revised view. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. you need to add one.

for Visible. and click OK. NOTE After you issue a revision. You can continue to add revisions. click Revisions. 298 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. under Add. 6 In the Revisions dialog. you can no longer modify it. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. select Issued. On the Settings menu. click Revisions. click New. select None for each issued revision.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu.

such as images. you learn to import information from other applications. double-click T .9 Click OK. into a project. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson.JPG.Title Sheet. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. under Sheets. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. and place it on a sheet. Importing Image Files In this exercise. and spreadsheets. Importing from Other Applications | 299 . 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. text. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.

you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. click to add text without a leader. click Modify. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt.doc text file in another window. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click T . 300 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . for Leader. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. under Sheets. click Text. 6 Select the text.5 On the Design Bar.

with the new text box still selected. click File menu ➤ Print. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. This step has been completed for you. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Under Printer. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. Importing Spreadsheets | 301 . 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. double-click A102 .Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format.rvt. 9 On the Design Bar. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet.JPG. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. enter Fixture Schedule.JPG.mdi. click Desktop. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. under Sheets. click Modify. for File name. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. This exercise demonstrates a common method.Unit 18. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. select the document writer. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 5 Click OK. click Training Files.xls. click Modify. 3 In Microsoft Excel. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit Architecture. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 10 On the Design Bar. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. and click Save. for Name. This process may vary from system to system.

302 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .12 Click File menu ➤ Save.

The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. called dependent views. The large floor plan. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. as well as a large lab building. or footprint.Using Dependent Views 8 In this tutorial. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. 303 . you break up the plan into sections. To effectively document this project.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 304 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .

| 305 .

2 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. for Name. 306 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 4 In the Rename View dialog. click Zoom To Fit. enter Level 2 . The dependent view opens.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click in the drawing area. 3 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. and click OK. 6 In the drawing area. under Level 2. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. double-click Level 2. right-click Dependent on Level 2. select the crop region. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar.Aviary. right-click Level 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Rename.

and the model crop is the interior crop region. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 307 . 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up.The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible.

and click Rename. 10 On the Zoom flyout.9 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). right-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 308 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 14 Click in the drawing area. 12 In the Project Browser.Labs. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. enter Level 2 . 13 In the Rename View dialog. click Zoom To Fit. 11 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the crop region. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). for Name. and click OK.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 309 . Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 2. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. click Matchline. click Zoom To Fit. 20 On the Zoom flyout.17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. click (Hide Crop Region). under Floor Plans.

(Align with the second column of lab cubicles.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 310 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. click Finish Sketch. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. and click. Click above the left corner of the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar.

32 In the Sheet Title dialog. under Floor Plans.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 311 . 33 In the Project Browser. 27 Under Matchline. for Line Weight. enter Level 2 Aviary. select Double Dash. expand Sheets. and click Rename. 31 In the Project Browser. and drag it onto the sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. 28 For Line Pattern. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. and click OK.Aviary. and click OK.Unnamed. click the Annotation Objects tab. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. right-click A101 . click Level 2 . select 9. for Name. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. for Target view. 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and place the Level 2 .Labs dependent view on the sheet.35 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click View Reference. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. 312 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 39 On the Options Bar. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . click Modify. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2.Aviary is selected.

under Floor Plans. for Target view. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . double-click Level 2 . 45 On the Zoom flyout. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 313 .Labs.Aviary. 44 On the Design Bar. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. click (Show Crop Region). click Modify. 46 In the Project Browser.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 47 On the View Control Bar. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar. click Zoom To Fit.

right-click. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. 49 If. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). after modifying the annotation crop region. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. click the far right control.48 Select the crop region. 314 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .

and click Apply Dependent Views. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 315 . and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. click (Hide Crop Region). After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. 53 In the Select Views dialog. Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select all views in the list. under Floor Plans. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. but are not placed on sheets. click Zoom To Fit. 55 On the Zoom flyout. right-click Level 2. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. expand Level 1.51 On the View Control Bar. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. 57 On the Zoom flyout. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. click Zoom To Fit. 54 In the Project Browser.

for Name. 5 In the drawing area.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. right-click South Elevation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 316 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. select the Crop Region. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The dependent view opens. expand South Elevation. enter South Elevation . The matchline is already placed in the view. and double-click South Elevation. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Rename View dialog.Left. and click OK. click Training Files. and click Rename. 3 In the Project Browser.Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

under Sheets. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. and click OK. cropping the view to the aviary. right-click South Elevation. and drag it toward the center of the view. 9 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. enter South Elevation . Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 317 . 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 8 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Project Browser. click (Hide Crop Region). enter South Elevation. 11 Select the crop region. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. cropping the view to the lab building. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.Right. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. right-click A103 Unnamed. for Name. click (Hide Crop Region). and click Rename. 13 On the View Control Bar. 7 On the View Control Bar. for Name.

verify that Elevation: South Elevation . click View Reference. click South Elevation . under Elevations. and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. 25 On the Options Bar.Left is selected. 23 In the Project Browser. for Target view. under Elevations. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. click South Elevation . 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. double-click South Elevation. 20 In the Project Browser.Right. under Elevations. click Modify. and drag it onto the sheet.18 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. 318 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.Left.

Right. 30 On the Design Bar.South Elevation. click Modify. select Elevation: South Elevation . under Sheets (all). 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 319 .28 On the Options Bar. for Target view. 31 In the Project Browser. double-click A103 .

Right-click the view.NOTE If the view references are not visible. Select the crop region. 320 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. and click Activate View.

Viewing and Rendering 4 321 .

322 | Chapter 9 Viewing and Rendering .

More specifically.Viewing 9 In this tutorial. you learn to create and customize views of building information models. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views. how to control fill pattern colors. 323 . and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components.

and double-click East. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. locate the Project Browser. and three-dimensional (3D) views. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. expand Views (all). click . you learn how to access different views of the building model. 324 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views.rvt. sections.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. expand Elevations. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. on the Standard toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. including elevation and three-dimensional views. You create elevations.

6 Under Visibility. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. click . The default name of the view is {3D}. click Visibility/Graphics. This change is applied only to the active view. scroll down and clear Window Tags. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. and click Hidden Line. 7 Click OK.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. click Model Graphics Style. Exploring the Building Model | 325 . Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. the east elevation. click the Annotation Categories tab. This change is applied only in this elevation view.

15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Move the mouse to pan the view. 16 In the Rename View dialog. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. and click OK. double-click My 3D View. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. enter My 3D View. The view follows the movement of the cursor. You can pan. and expand 3D Views. right-click {3D}. and click Rename. . click to reorient the view. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. expand Views (all). under 3D Views. zoom. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. 326 | Chapter 9 Viewing .9 On the View toolbar. 12 Press and hold CTRL. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. click X to close the view. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. . Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser.

the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 327. and distance from the target. m_Viewing_Exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). eye height. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and double-click Level 1. click Camera. outside of the dimension lines. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 327 . you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.rvt. as shown in the following illustration. Cameras define the eye point. and click View. right-click in the Design Bar. After you specify the second point (the view target). 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing.

8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. 328 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and sideways to see how the view changes. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. down. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. Move the cursor up. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. click Dynamically Modify View. Press and hold the left mouse button.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. Press and hold the left mouse button. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. 5 On the View menu. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.

Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. Change the camera position. click Tile. 13 On the View menu. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. Press and hold the left mouse button. and target 12 On the Window menu. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 329 . You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. height.

14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 15 In the Project Browser. and click Show Camera. right-click 3D View 1. 16 In the Project Browser. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. under 3D Views. 330 | Chapter 9 Viewing . double-click 3D View 1. double-click Level 1. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views.

3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. and click Shading. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. click to create a new 3D view. right-click. In the Element Properties dialog. and move it to another location. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 331 . click Model Graphics Style.17 In My 3D View. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. and click Element Properties. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. under Camera. Click OK. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. 20 On the View Control Bar.

24 Click the section box.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. A section box is displayed around the model. under Extents. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 332 | Chapter 9 Viewing . as shown in the following illustration. click View Properties. A rotation tool is also displayed. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. select Section Box. 22 On the View menu. and click OK.

and rotate the section box around the model.26 Click and hold the rotation tool. double-click Level 1. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating a Section View” on page 333. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Section View In this exercise. and maximize this view. Creating a Section View | 333 . you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Viewing_Exercise. click Section.

double-click the section head. 4 On the Design Bar. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. right-click. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. and click Open View. and double-click Section 1.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. expand Sections. click Modify. 7 In the Go To View dialog. 334 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 6 In the Project Browser. or in the Project Browser. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. and click Find Referring Views. View the section 5 To view the section. 8 Select the section line. select the section view. select Floor Plan: Level 1.

9 On the Design Bar. m_Viewing_Exercise. Notice the change in the view direction. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. 12 Select the section line. Notice the change in section depth. Creating Elevation Views | 335 . Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 335. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view.rvt. move the cursor around the building model. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Elevation. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify.

The elevation is named Elevation 1 . 336 | Chapter 9 Viewing . The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol.b. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. Elevation 1 .4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby.a by default. and click. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. Do not select the arrow. double-click Level 1. 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.a. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. under Elevations. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. click Modify. Elevation 1 . zoom in. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. double-click Elevation 1 . 5 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Project Browser.b. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create.

rvt. in this case. For example. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. and open Common\c_Showroom. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 337 . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise.11 If you want to save your changes. such as the one below. on the File menu. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. in a compound wall. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. a shade of gray. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. This includes walls. and applies to phasing override materials as well. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as Brick on CMU. floors. and other families. where each layer is assigned a different material. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. click Save As. click Training Files. roofs. In addition. and the insulation color to pink.

7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. and click OK twice. expand Views (all). click Color.Brick for Name. select red. 5 In the Color dialog. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. 338 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and double-click Wall/Floor Join .Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. select Masonry .Filled). Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. expand Views (all). 2 On the Settings menu. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. expand 3D Views. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. expand Sections (Section Head . The surface pattern of the brick is black. 4 Under Cut Pattern. select Masonry . The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. click Materials. 9 In the Materials dialog. click Materials. 3 In the Materials dialog.Brick for Name. and double-click 3D.Level 3. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser.

12 Proceed to the next exercise. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics.rvt. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. and double-click Level 1. select white. The surface pattern of the brick is now white.10 Under Surface Pattern. expand Views (all). 2 On the View menu. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. click Color. c_Showroom. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. and click OK twice. click View Properties. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. 11 In the Color dialog. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 339 . “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 339. expand Floor Plans.

Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. 7 In the Color dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. click Edit/New. click Modify. click Save As. select a shade of gray. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. right-click. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click OK three times. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. and click Fine. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. and click Element Properties. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click Detail Level. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 10 On the Design Bar. . The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. on the File menu. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. select Solid fill for Name. double-click Level 2. 12 On the View Control Bar. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. By default. although they may have 340 | Chapter 9 Viewing . If you create more than one plan region in a file. 14 If you want to save your changes. and click OK.

coincident edges. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or pattern. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. refer to the online Help for more information. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 341 . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Architecture. and you cannot control their visibility. line type. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. line color. click Training Files. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view.rvt. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Architecture files.

the south elevation is also displayed. click Plan Region. so you can view the height of the walls and windows.View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. view range. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. 342 | Chapter 9 Viewing . On the Options Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. click Lines. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. and click View. In the following illustration. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. expand Floor Plans. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. 3 In the Level 1 view. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. and the view depth plane. Plan regions have a single property. the top and bottom clip planes. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. click . which is similar to the view range for plan views.

and then click OK twice. click Finish Sketch.■ ■ On the Design Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 On the Design Bar. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. under Extents. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. 4 Select the plan region. the line turns red. click Edit for View Range. click Modify. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 343 . select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. 8 Click Apply. and click Element Properties. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. right-click. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. By selecting Parent View’s Level. top and bottom clip planes. When you select the plan region. 6 In the View Range dialog. The plan region displays as a dashed green line. Press ESC to end the command.

click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 344 | Chapter 9 Viewing . on the File menu. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. 10 If you want to save your changes.

AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Architecture that is used to produce rendered views. 345 .Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. and posters. to place and render decals to create signs. billboards. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit Architecture 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model.

change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. the floor. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. When you complete these changes. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. you select a scene that defines the model environment. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. In this exercise. After you create the perspective view. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. 346 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. and create the perspective view that you want to render. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model.

and open Metric\m_Cohouse. and click Edit/New.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. right-click in the Design Bar. 8 In the Materials dialog.rvt. click Training Files. click Materials. and click the tab in the context menu. click . 3 On the Options Bar. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. verify that Co-house . 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . In the left pane of the Open dialog. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed.Cavity Wall . under Construction.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Masonry . 4 In the Element Properties dialog.Brick. click Wall. under Name. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 Under AccuRender. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 347 . 5 In the Type Properties dialog.Brick. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. click Edit for Structure.

for Layer 2. . click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 348 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Asphalt. 27 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. enter Aluminum. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. click Modify. 23 Under AccuRender. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. 24 In the Material Library.200mm. under _accurender. 18 In the Materials dialog. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. 12 Click OK twice. expand Metals. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. and click Aluminum. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit for Structure. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. 26 Click OK twice. under _accurender. expand Masonry and click Brick.Plain. select Polished. click Materials. 25 Under Name. and click . click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. 11 Under Name. under Construction. 14 On the Options Bar.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. Polished and click OK. under Name. under Name. select Site . 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. 19 Click OK four times. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. select Carib.Running. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. 22 In the New Material dialog.

29 On the Options Bar. click Region Raytrace. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click in the Material field. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. verify that New is selected. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. under Name. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. select Exterior under Type. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. and then click . 33 Click OK three times. select Aluminum. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. click Edit/New.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. click . and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. Polished. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 349 . select the curtain wall mullion again. 32 In the Materials dialog. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. click No. floor. 31 In the Type Properties dialog.

floor. 38 On the Design Bar. and double-click 1st Flr.rvt. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments).The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. producing a photorealistic effect. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. when you render an exterior view of the model. “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 350. In a later exercise. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. you place two different types of trees on the building site. m_Cohouse. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. Cnst. 350 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Views (all). click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. expand Floor Plans.

4 In the Type Selector. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. Create a new type of tree. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site.9 Meters.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. and click Site. Adding Trees to the Site | 351 . click Site Component. and click . click Modify. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. 7 In the Type Selector. select M_Tree . 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click to place a tree. and click Site Component. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. select any of the deciduous trees. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar.

select Oak. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. m_Cohouse. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. 352 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter 7000mm for Plant Height.rvt. 12 In the Plant Library. and then click display the Plant Library. and click OK. click Duplicate. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 352. under Identity Data. select Black Oak for Type Comments. as shown in the following illustration. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Black Oak. expand Trees and Shrubs. 15 Under Other. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. click Edit/New. 13 Under Name. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and place two black oak trees. Black. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. click in the Value field for Plant Name. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.8 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Name dialog. under accurender. under Other. and click OK twice. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. and click Deciduous.

3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. The new perspective view is displayed. on the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View | 353 . click Camera. Cnst.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. view open.

The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. Cnst. double-click 1st Flr. Cnst. and click Show Camera. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). expand 3D Views. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. view.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 354 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

and click OK. and click Rename. double-click Exterior. lighting. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. right-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views.rvt. enter Exterior.7 In the Project Browser. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 355. place. you select a scene and specify time. 8 In the Rename View dialog. date. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. m_Cohouse. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and environment settings that you use to render the view. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 355 .

Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Settings. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 8 Under Time. under Scene Settings. Time. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. 6 Select By Date. and click Sun. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. 356 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. click the Solar Angles tab.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. 7 Under Date. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected.

Rye. 20 In the Name list. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. click Site. The Ground Plane tab displays. and click OK. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog.20 for Cloudiness.00 (many clouds. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. click Image Size. click Raytrace. under Background Color. MA. 11 Scroll down. 26 On the Design Bar.9 Click the Place tab. click Capture Rendering. 16 In the Environment dialog. under Scene Settings. under _accurender. select Grass. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. 27 On the Options Bar. 18 Click Material. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene.) 14 Click OK. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 19 In the Material Library. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 357 . click . 13 Enter . Dark. 21 Click OK twice. click No. 10 Click in the Cities list. under Scene Settings. and select Boston. select Good for Quality. USA. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. select Ground Plane. and enter bo. 17 Under Advanced. select Autumn for Plant Season. click Environment. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. 12 Click the Settings Tab.

you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. on the File menu.30 On the Design Bar. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 32 If you want to save this exercise. m_Cohouse. To create the rendered scene. Cnst. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. expand Renderings. and double-click 2nd Flr. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. expand Floor Plans. 358 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Adding RPC People In this exercise. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). and finally. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 358. define the view and render scene settings. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson.

4 In the Type Selector.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest).2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. Adding RPC People | 359 . 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. select Rotate after placement. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). click Component. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Repeat steps 4 . select M_RPC Female: Cathy.

m_Cohouse. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 360. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt.8 Proceed to the next exercise. click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. 360 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

Creating the Interior Perspective View | 361 . Cnst. double-click 2nd Flr.■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. The interior perspective is displayed.

right-click 3D View 1. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. enter 229 mm for Width.4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. enter 178 mm for Height. and click Rename. and click OK. under Size. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 362 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click the dimensions for Size.

12 On the View menu. and click OK. click View Properties. 11 On the View menu. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. A section box is displayed around the building model.9 In the Rename View dialog. and select the section box. select Section Box. enter Interior. 15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. click to display the 3D view of the building model. 14 On the Design Bar. under Extents. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 363 . click Modify. Grips are displayed on the section box. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it.

Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. and select Boston. under Scene Settings. and enter bo. and click Sun. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 364. under Scene Settings. click Settings. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 14 Click Save. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 17 In the Environment dialog. 4 Under Type. on the Main tab. you reduce the rendering time. under Background Color. 8 Under Date. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. MA. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. 11 Click in the Cities list. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. and click Save. select New. you create a render scene to specify the time. under 3D Views. 9 Under Time. 12 Scroll down. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. 10 Click the Place tab. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. Time. click Environment. and environment settings used to render the view. 364 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. 13 Click the Settings tab. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. place. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. date. By limiting the geometry. m_Cohouse. click the Solar Angles tab. select Interior. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day.rvt.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. USA. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. and enter Interior Scene for Name. 7 Select By Date. specify a file location and name for the scene settings.

Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. under Use View’s Section Box.rvt. click Site.18 Under Advanced. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. select {3D}. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. and click OK. click Radiate. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 365. 21 In the Name list. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. double-click {3D}. click Daylights. select Summer for Plant Season. as daylight sources. click OK. select Grass. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. m_Cohouse. 22 Click OK twice. You can select families with transparent materials. Curtain Wall 1). double-click Interior. under accurender. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 24 Under Scene Settings. 19 Click Material. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. The Ground Plane tab displays. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. 20 In the Material Library. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 365 . Rye. such as windows and doors. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. under 3D Views. Dark. select Ground Plane. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view.

Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. 366 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . the following rendered view is displayed. which can take several minutes. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps.The radiosity process. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 8 On the Options Bar. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. click Raytrace. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. . When radiate completes. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. on the File menu. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 9 If you want to save your changes. begins. 10 Close the exercise file. 7 On the Design Bar. click Save As.

proceeds through the dining room. If you prefer to use Metric values. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2008. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The walkthrough path is a spline. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. and ends in the far corner of the living room. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. or section view. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. In a plan view. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 367 . you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Architecture software. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. and change unit formats as desired. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. elevation. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. but you can also define it in a 3D. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. and open Common\c_Townhouse. click Settings ➤ Project Units.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you must select or define a scene. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames.rvt. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model.

3 On the Options Bar. and double-click Walkthrough 1. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. and double-click 1st Floor. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. and click the tab in the context menu. on the Options Bar. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). or the first key frame. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. and click to specify the start point. of the walkthrough. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. expand Views (all). 368 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click . expand Walkthroughs. click Walkthrough.

Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. 14 Click . click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). and select the crop boundary. 11 Under Change. 13 On the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration.The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. Creating a Walkthrough | 369 . 12 On the View menu. and click OK. verify Field of view is selected. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. If it is not. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. select the crop boundary. 9 On the Options Bar.

The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 370. click Edit Walkthrough. and click OK. The walkthrough plays. and click OK. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. clear Far Clip Active. 16 On the Options Bar. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing.rvt. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 370 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. enter 1 for Frame. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. c_Townhouse. 17 Click . you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. proceed to the next exercise.15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. under Extents. press ESC. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. double-click 1st Floor.

6 On the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 371 . Blue grips are displayed at each key frame.The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. select Path for Controls. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). You can move any camera target or key frame position.

3 Under Output Length. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. The AVI is recorded. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. hidden line. under Walkthroughs. 4 Under Format. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. specify 15 for Frames per Second. 2 In the Save As dialog. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. When you export the walkthrough. 9 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI.7 Click the third key frame position. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. shaded. click Edit Walkthrough. shaded with edges. and click OK. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Walkthrough 1. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system.rvt. select <Shading> for Display mode. 372 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . or with AccuRender raytracing. without opening Revit Architecture 2008. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. If you are unsure of what option to use. and click Save. and then click to play the walkthrough. 1 On the File menu. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 372. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. c_Townhouse.

9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. click Save As. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. reducing the size of the image. Recording the Walkthrough | 373 . specifying the number of frames.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. 8 If you want to save this exercise.

374 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. 375 . More specifically. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. In this tutorial.

click Training Files. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. A 3D view is created. Creating a Solar Study . 1 In the Project Browser. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. 376 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .Courtyard View In this exercise. and double-click 01 Entry.rvt. as shown. expand Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. click Camera. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.

double-click 01 Entry. right-click 3D View 1. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you create a section cutaway view. if necessary.Courtyard View. expand 3D Views. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 377. 10 On the File menu. as shown. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. and click Rename. as shown. 7 Click the view boundary to select it. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 377 . under Floor Plans. 9 In the Rename View dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. click Save As. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view. enter Solar Study . click to reorient the view. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.4 On the View toolbar.

click Section. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 6 To view the section. click Modify. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. 378 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 5 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. click . to reorient the view. and click OK. expand Sections. right-click Section 1. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. click 10 On the View toolbar. double-click the section head.3 On the Design Bar.

then select Medium. you create a plan cutaway view. as shown. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. and click Rename. 17 To hide the section box. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. then Fine. click Modify. including the house. to expand the dialog. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. 14 In the Project Browser. 18 On the File menu. as shown. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. and under Orient to a View. On the Annotation Categories tab.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 379 . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 379. 16 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry. click Callout. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. click Save.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 15 In the Rename View dialog. In some cases. under 3D Views. right-click {3D}. Typical plan views. and click OK. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. do not display many elements in 3D.

14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. click 8 On the View toolbar. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. as shown. 380 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. and click Rename. and click OK. 6 In the Rename View dialog. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. click Modify. to reorient the view. 5 In the Project Browser. and under Orient to a View. as shown. click . 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 11 On the Design Bar.4 In the Project Browser. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. under Floor Plans. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model.

click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click Rename. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 20 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Rename View dialog. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. and click OK. right-click {3D}. click Save. 21 On the File menu. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. so you can see into the building from the top. 18 In the Project Browser. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . 16 On the View Control Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 381 .Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial.15 Select the Roof.

For this study. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . expand Views (all). and double-click Solar Study . and preview the effects of each study as an animation. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. and click OK. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab.Boston. and time. 2 On the View Control Bar. enter Summer Solstice. For the Single-Day solar study. 3 Select Cast Shadows. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. and time range. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. 382 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . CA. USA. click .Courtyard View. date. 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you specify the location. single-day. and click Duplicate. USA is selected. date range. You can create a still. or multi-day solar study. Click the Single-Day tab. select Los Angeles.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click OK.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. 10 Under Place. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. Creating Solar Studies . you specify the location. expand 3D Views. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. leave the slider at 50. Los Angeles. 9 In the Name dialog. MA. click . 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. for City. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. For the Multi-Day solar study. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field.

19 On the File menu. select June 22. 6 On the View Control Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. under Sun and Shadows Settings. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 383. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. under Frame. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. Los Angeles. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. and click OK. For Time Range. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. on the Single-Day tab. . 2006.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Los Angeles is selected. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 2 On the View Control Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. click OK. 16 In the Name dialog. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. click . 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. and click Duplicate. ■ For Time Interval. enter 20 and press ENTER.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. Los Angeles. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. confirm that Summer Solstice. enter 10 and press ENTER. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. click OK. enter Winter Solstice.Courtyard View is currently displayed. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 383 . for Date. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 2006. click . select Winter Solstice. click Save. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click To display the next key frame. select December 22. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. 14 In this case. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. Under Frame. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. click . and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Clear Ground Plane at Level.

on the Single-Day tab. select Summer Solstice. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. click . Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. approximately as shown. The solar study animation plays. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . click OK. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. under Floor Plans. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. approximately as shown. double-click 01 Entry. click . Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. Click and enter Dining. Click outside of the text box to end the command. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. 384 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. and click OK. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. . Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click To play the animation from start to finish. Los Angeles. 13 On the View Control Bar. click Text. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house.■ To display the next sequential frame.

and click OK. 6 On the View Control Bar. expand 3D Views. click Lines. select Summer Solstice. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. and click OK. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. 5 In the Project Browser. as shown. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 11 To display the section box. Exporting the Study as AVI | 385 . select Section Boxes. click . 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Los Angeles. On the Annotation Categories tab. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Options Bar. click . on the Single-Day tab. as shown. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK.

Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click OK. verify that the value is set to 15. 14 Click outside of the section box. For Frames per second. clear Section Boxes. Under Output Length. For Dimensions. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. 386 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . On the Annotation Categories tab. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. and enter 5 to 50. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. if necessary. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. To maintain the proportions of the frame. for Model Graphics Style. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically.12 In the drawing area. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. Under Format. select Frame range. select AVI Files. verify that Hidden Line is selected. 15 To hide the section box. as shown.Los Angeles. select the section box. enter 450 in the first field (width). For Save as type. For File name. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang.

NOTE When you export to PNG. click Save. TIFF. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. depending on the Frame Range.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 18 In the Save As dialog. verify that Hidden Line is selected. Under Output Length. and click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. or any single-frame format. click . as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 387 . select PNG. and enter 5 to 10. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. For Dimensions. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. of the animation separately. you open each image. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. click Save. or GIF. 20 On the File menu. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. Under Format. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. click Save. Los Angeles. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 387. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. For Frames per second. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. To view the animation. on the Single-Day tab. such as JPEG. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. verify that the value is set to 15. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. for Model Graphics Style. select Frame range. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . select Winter Solstice. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. or frame. In this example.Los Angeles. 8 In the Save As dialog. click OK. and click OK. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. BMP. For File name. for Compressor. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter 450 in the first field (width). For Save as type.

double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. under 3D Views. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. 388 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Save.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson.9 On the File menu. 2 Select the section box in the drawing area.

Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 5 Select the roof. and on the View Control Bar. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 389 . as shown.NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.

Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. and click Duplicate. clear Section Boxes. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Click the Desktop icon. and click OK. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. and click Save. click Save. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. select One week. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). For Time. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . and click OK. In the Save As dialog. click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 18 On the File menu.Week Interval. for Compressor. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box.Boston. 390 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 12 In the Name dialog. for File name enter 2pm . under Sun and Shadows Settings. for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. and click OK. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. USA. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 8 On the View Control Bar. For Time Interval. 17 On the View Control Bar. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . On the Annotation Categories tab. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. and click OK. MA. 16 In the Video Compression dialog. click the Multi-Day tab. specify 2:00 pm.Los Angeles .

click Apply. and select Winter Solstice. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. select Cast Shadows. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. click . NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. click the Still tab. on the Still tab. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify 11:00 AM for time. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 9 Under Date and Time. 11 Under Date and Time. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. and click OK. change the time back to 12:00 PM. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Orienting to True North | 391 . 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. Then. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . and click OK. select Summer Solstice. and click OK. In this exercise. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area. click . 2 On the View Control Bar. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. For example. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.

In the Element Properties dialog. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select True North. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. click OK. click OK. Notice that the project rotates in the view. double-click 01 Entry. under Graphics. On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click OK. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . for Orientation. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. 13 On the View Control Bar. and select Winter Solstice. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 392 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Floor Plans. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and select View Properties. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. in the Angle from Project to True North field. click the Still tab.

Orienting to True North | 393 . under 3D Views. are saved with the project. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. for File name. click the Still tab. and click OK. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. including the angle from True North. click Summer Solstice. verify that AVI Files is selected. In the Save As dialog. click . 21 On the View Control Bar. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Los Angeles. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. For Save as type. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 19 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. click the Single-Day tab. 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Summer Solstice.

Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and exporting it as a JPEG image. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. In this exercise. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. under Floor Plans. enter 600 in the first field. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. click GO. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. double-click 01 Entry. Right-click in the drawing area. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Project Browser. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345 for additional information on rendering. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. for Orientation. and click OK. Since a rendered image is temporary. capturing it. for Resolution. 28 Once you are finished with the study. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. for Compressor. Rendered views do not have this limitation. and click Save. click Raytrace. On the Options Bar. click Save. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. under 3D Views. for Dimensions.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and select View Properties. and click OK. On the Options Bar. under Graphics. select Draft (75 dpi). 394 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .■ Under Format. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. 1 In the Project Browser. In the Element Properties dialog. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. select Project North. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. for Scene. 29 On the File menu. under 3D Views. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. Click the Desktop icon.

select Presentation (300 dpi). click Save. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor.■ ■ On the Options Bar. In the Save As dialog. for Resolution. 7 Review some captured images of the building. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. click GO. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. for Save as Type. under Renderings. click Capture Rendering. and click Save. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. In the Project Browser. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. select JPEG. The scene is rendered in high resolution. On the Options Bar. Rendering an Interior View | 395 . click Export Image.

396 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

Advanced Model Graphics. For the realistic approach. a consultant. or the client. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. and details." In Revit Architecture. Whether the audience is the general contractor. In this tutorial. To express texture beyond material specifics. the Linework Tool. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. an outside reviewer. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. type. you explore the stylistic approach.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. length." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. and Section Boxes. elevations. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 397 . In this series of exercises. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. sections. A majority of tools in Revit Architecture 2008 are intended to describe number. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. there are several options for expressing the architecture. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Architecture can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345.

building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Using the pre-built building model. Co-house. 398 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.

and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. you create a copy of the plan. right-click 2nd Flr. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. expand Views (all). Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 399 . you create a presentation floor plan.rvt. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. expand Floor Plans. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Cnst. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation.

click Save As. exit the menu. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. click in the drawing area. Down Arrow. this represents the view getting smaller.2 In the Project Browser. 7 Under Visibility. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. and clear DOWN Text. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. expand the Stairs category. and click Rename. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 10 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. 400 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . dimensions. Up Arrow. sections. elevations. This turns off the visibility of all tags. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. click the Scale control and select 1:100. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. 8 Click OK. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice that no annotations display in this view. UP Text. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. click the Annotation Categories tab. and so on in this view. Cnst.

4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. the darker the shadows. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. and click OK. Under Shadows Properties. navigate to the folder of your choice.rvt.11 In the Save As directory. 5 Under Settings. and click Save. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. The higher the number. select By Date. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. select Sun and Shadow Settings. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. 8 Select Boston. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. click for Place. Within a Project. and click Advanced Model Graphics. modify. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. double-click it in the Project Browser. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. on the Still tab. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 401 . NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. At that place. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. Time and Place. 6 Under Settings. ■ Under Intensity. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 401. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. click the Place tab. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. select Cast Shadows. USA for City. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. 2 On the View Control Bar. click . you can create. specify 35 for Shadow. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. MA. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.

and select 1st Flr. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. clear Ground Plane at Level. Cnst. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. and click OK. 10 Select Ground Plane at Level. 17 On the File menu. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Settings. “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 403. be aware that if you enter a different city.NOTE For this step. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. you can enter any city you wish. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click . 18 Proceed with the next exercise. however. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 11 Click OK. click OK. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. click Save. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 402 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. right-click the Design Bar. select Arch Portrait. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. and click OK. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 4 In the Views dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 403 . click Modify. click Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. and notice a view title displays. TIP If the View tab is not available. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. and click View. click Add View. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to place it.

11 In the Type Properties dialog.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. and click OK. and click Activate View. click Edit/New. select No for Show Title. under Graphics. click . you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. 12 In the Name dialog. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. For this analytique. 9 On the Options Bar. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 404 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click OK. To accomplish this. click Duplicate. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Presentation. and click OK. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport.

and select Chain. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. enter Solid Black. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. click Filled Region. click Edit/New. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. click . TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. 17 In the Type Selector. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. select Invisible Lines. under Graphics. click Region Properties. click . You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 405 .16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 20 On the Options Bar. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. and click OK. and the boundary of the region. fill properties. When you are finished drawing the chain. click Duplicate. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. click . draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. If necessary. 25 In the Name dialog. for Fill Pattern. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines.

select Solid Fill. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. and click View Properties. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click Save.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. scroll down. 406 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 35 Proceed with the next lesson. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 30 On the Design Bar. and click Deactivate View. under Identity Data. 34 On the File menu. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 406. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. click Finish Sketch. under Name. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. and click OK. and click OK.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. enter Presentation South Elevation. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. on the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. under Views (all). click in the Walls row. and click Rename. scroll up. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. expand Elevations. under Visibility. and clear Elevation Swing. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. expand the Doors category. right-click Copy of South. under Visibility.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click in the drawing area. and click OK. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 407 . exit the menu. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. click Override. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Elevations. under Pattern Overrides. clear Visible. and click OK. right-click South.rvt. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls.

click Save. 408 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. select Cast Shadows. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. and click OK. By changing the angle of the sun. and click OK. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 13 Under Intensity. click Duplicate. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. specify 35 for Shadow. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. under Settings. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click OK. 16 In the Name dialog. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 12 Under Shadow Properties.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. click . 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 408. 20 On the File menu. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. select By Date. Time and Place. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

and click Add View to Sheet.rvt. and double-click A105 . Notice the viewport displays a view title.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). under Views (all).Presentation. click Add View. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 409 . 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. 3 In the Views dialog. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

Notice the view title no longer displays. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. click Modify. select Viewport: Presentation. 410 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .5 In the Type Selector.

Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson.8 On the File menu. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 411 . “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 411. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. click Save.

To accomplish this. and double-click Section 2. Section 2 is added to the building model. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Cnst. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). and use the flip arrows if necessary. expand Sections (Callout 1). under Floor Plans. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. 412 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 1st Flr. select 1: 100 for Scale. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Add the section shown below. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Section. To fit correctly in the analytique. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.

This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. double-click Presentation Section 2. 11 In the Rename View dialog. clear Visible. under Sections (Callout 1). and click Rename. 15 Under Visibility. right-click Callout of Section 2. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 413 . select 1 : 100 for Scale. click Visibility/Graphics. click in the Walls row. and click OK. click the Model Categories tab. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. 12 In the Project Browser. click Callout. enter Presentation Section 2. 10 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. under Pattern Overrides.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). click Override. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.

414 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Extents. When you select the crop boundary.17 Under Visibility. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. 20 Click OK. clear Crop Region Visible. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 22 On the Options Bar. expand the Doors category. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. clear Annotation Crop. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. and clear Elevation Swing. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click OK. click . The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. scroll up. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements.

2 On the View Control Bar. Click Apply. double-click Presentation Section 2. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. Under Intensity. select Cast Shadows. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Under Shadows Properties.24 On the File menu. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 415. click Save. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. In addition. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 415 . Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. open the Project Browser and. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view.rvt. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. specify 35 for Shadow. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise.

12 Proceed with the next exercise. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. was added to this dataset for training purposes. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 417. and click OK. and click OK. under Settings. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. click Duplicate. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. under Silhouette Edges. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Relative to View. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 5 In the Name dialog. 11 On the File menu. and click OK. click . specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. Silhouette Edges.In the steps that follow. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Directly. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK. click Save. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. 416 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . NOTE The line style. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. select Override Silhouettes. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth.

you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. 3 In the Views dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 417 . 6 On the Design Bar. The view title no longer displays. under Sheets (all). select Section: Presentation Section 2. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.Presentation. click Modify. 5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation. double-click A105 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place the selected view. and click Add View to Sheet.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. click Add View.

click . you click to specify the start radius. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. 418 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click Section 2. To rotate an object. and press ENTER. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. In the steps that follow. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. Using a clock as a reference. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius.

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 419 .Presentation. Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. double-click A105 . and drag it up and to the left as shown. under Sheets (all). 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. the callout rotates 180 degrees. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click OK. and click OK. 420 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation.rvt. click Save. 2 On the View menu. double-click Presentation Section 2. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. After applying the view template to a new section view. 3 In the New View Template dialog. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. under Sections (Callout 1). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Modify. 4 In the View Templates dialog. click Create View Template from View. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 420.15 On the Design Bar. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 16 On the File menu. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise.

click Add View. and click Activate View. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 6 In the Project Browser. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. 9 In the Select View Template dialog. Now. and click Rename. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. Notice the furniture. select Section: Presentation Section 1. click View Properties.Presentation. under Sheets (all). 7 In the Rename View dialog. 15 Right-click the viewport. right-click Copy of Section 1. select Presentation. annotations. Working with a Presentation View Template | 421 . 14 In the Type Selector.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Add View to Sheet. right-click Section 1. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. select Viewport: Presentation. under Sections (Type 1). double-click A105 . and click OK. lighting fixtures. click Apply View Template. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and elevation swings no longer display. you can simply apply the presentation view template. 16 On the View menu. 12 In the Views dialog. under Sections (Type 1). enter Presentation Section 1. and click OK.

such as a tracery window or column capital. 18 Right-click the viewport. click Save. under Graphics. traditional analytiques contain a detail. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. In this exercise. and click Deactivate View. and click OK.17 In the Element Properties dialog. 422 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 20 On the File menu. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 422.

rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 1.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 5 In the Rename View dialog. Working in a Callout Analytique | 423 . and click OK. and click Rename. right-click Callout of Section 1. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. click Callout. under Sections (Type 1). 6 In the Project Browser. click Modify. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sections (Callout 1). 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. After you add the callout. 4 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). select the callout. double-click Presentation Callout. enter Presentation Callout.

clear Annotation Crop. and click OK. clear Crop Region Visible. and click View Properties.7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. under Extents. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 424 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 8 Right-click.

20 Select the callout presentation viewport. and click Deactivate View. click View Properties. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. click Add View. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. select Custom for View Scale. 15 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Views dialog. 14 In the Type Selector.Presentation. 17 On the View menu. and click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. under Sheets (all). select Section: Presentation Callout. click Modify. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and move it into the position shown below. double-click A105 . select Viewport: Presentation. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. Working in a Callout Analytique | 425 . and click Activate View.

activate the viewport. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. and make adjustments as necessary. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. You do not have to replicate the image exactly.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 23 On the Design Bar. select Solid Black for Type. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 426 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Filled Region. In the steps that follow. under Sections (Callout 1). click Region Properties. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. double-click Presentation Callout. and click OK. When finished. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base.

26 On the Project Browser. click Filled Region. and click Activate View.Presentation. Working in a Callout Analytique | 427 . Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. click . under Sheets (all). 29 On the Options Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. double-click A105 . 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

428 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Crop Region Visible. click View Properties. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 33 Select the crop region. under Extents. and click OK.30 On the Design Bar. 31 On the View menu. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays.

click View Properties. and apply shadows to the views. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 429.34 On the View menu. under Extents. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. clear Crop Region Visible. click Save. and click Deactivate View. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. 37 On the File menu. and click OK. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 429 . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Under Intensity. specify 35 for Shadow. 3 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and click 1 : 200. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 430 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 2 On the View menu. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click the Scale control. Under Shadows Properties. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Duplicate. click Orient ➤ Southwest. select Cast Shadows. 7 In the Name dialog. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click the Advanced Model Graphics control.rvt. under 3D Views. double-click Isometric.

Select Relative to View. under 3D Views. 16 In the Rename View dialog. in the list. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. and click Rename. 14 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 2. under Settings. under 3D Views. and click OK. under 3D Views. 18 On the View menu. under 3D Views. 15 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 1. 13 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Isometric 1. click View Properties. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 431 .8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 9 Click OK. double-click Isometric 2. and click Rename. and click OK. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. and click OK. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. under Silhouette Edges. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. under Extents. Cnst. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. Select 1st Flr. select Override Silhouettes. and click OK. right-click Isometric. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. select Section Box. Select Ground Plane at Level.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Modify on the Design Bar. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. make a duplicate of the view. right-click Isometric 2. You can use this to rotate the section box. 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 23 In the Project Browser. When you are finished. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box.20 Select the section box. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. 432 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. under 3D Views. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. and click Rename.

clear Section Boxes. and click OK. select Viewport: Presentation. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 433 . clear Section Boxes.24 In the Rename View dialog. under Sheets (all). under 3D Views. In such a case. Next. double-click Isometric 3. 25 In the Project Browser. 29 Select the section box. double-click A105 . or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. either adjust the plane location. double-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views.Presentation. and click OK. in the Type Selector. 34 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 3. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. click Modify on the Design Bar. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. the stairs and railings may display. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. 26 To hide the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 31 To hide the section box. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. Notice the section box no longer displays. When you are finished.

select Viewport: Presentation. in the Type Selector. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. select Viewport: Presentation.35 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. 434 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 36 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and.

click Lines. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 43 On the Design Bar. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. This will make it easier to draw lines. 42 Click OK twice. 38 Select the poche filled region. select Solid Black for Type. The image below shows the lines redrawn. click Finish Sketch. select Transparent for Background. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. and click Activate View. and click OK. click Region Properties. and click Deactivate View. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 435 . and then click Edit/New. click Edit. 44 Using the drawing tools. 45 On the Design Bar. 47 On the Design Bar. select Concrete for Type. under Graphics. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. and on the Options Bar.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 39 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties.

Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. click Save.49 On the File menu. double-click 1st Flr. click Camera. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you create the final view for the analytique. you add it to the presentation sheet. under Floor Plans. then you specify the eye direction and range.rvt. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 436. 436 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. Cnst. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. a cutaway perspective view.

4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. specify 35 for Shadow. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Under Shadows Properties. select Cast Shadows. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click . Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. Under Intensity.The view opens immediately. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 437 .

and click OK. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. 12 Select the section box. Notice the controls that display on each plane. under Silhouette Edges. select Section Box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. A section box now cuts through the building model.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click View Properties. and click OK. under Extents. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. select Override Silhouettes. 438 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.

under Sheets (all). enter 165 mm for Width. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. select Scale (locked proportions).14 Select the crop boundary. 19 To hide the section box. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 439 . you must specify the actual size of the image. under Change. and click OK. Clear Crop Region Visible. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. under 3D Views. 18 To hide the crop region.Presentation. double-click A105 . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Section Boxes. 17 Under Model Crop Size. After placing it. 15 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. and click OK. click Size. click View menu ➤ View Properties. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation.

2 On the Options Bar. specify a text size of 40 mm. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate. select Text : Title. click Edit/New. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Name dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.22 On the File menu. specify a text size of 6 mm. and click OK. under Text. 5 In the Name dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 440 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Text. enter Title. and click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Duplicate. click Save. under Text. enter Description. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. select a font. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise.rvt. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 440. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. select the same font as the title. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. click OK. click .

click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. select Text : Description. Annotating the Analytique | 441 . 15 In the Type Selector. click Save. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 18 On the File menu.

442 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 5 443 .

444 | Chapter 13 Importing and Exporting

Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

13

In this tutorial, you learn how to export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk®3ds Max® or Autodesk®VIZ, where you render it and create a daylight analysis. Autodesk 3ds Max is a professional three-dimensional animation package that provides robust animation, modelling, and workflow functionality for the most complex problems in design visualization and visual effects. Autodesk VIZ is a 3D modelling, rendering, and presentation software application that provides state-of-the-art image creation technologies for communicating and sharing your design intent. For simplicity, this tutorial uses 3ds Max, but the same workflow applies in VIZ. NOTE To complete this tutorial, you must have Autodesk 3ds Max 9 installed on your system. If you do not have 3ds Max installed on your system, or if you have an earlier version of the software, you can download a free trial from the Autodesk website.

445

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk 3ds Max and render it. To export the building model to 3ds Max, you select a 3D view of the building in Revit Architecture and export its geometry and data to a DWG file. You then link the DWG file to a new 3ds Max scene. NOTE You can also import the DWG file into 3ds Max, but linking allows you to easily update the 3ds Max scene with any changes that you make to the Revit Architecture model after you initially import it. After you link the DWG file in 3ds Max, you quickly render a view of the building model. The AccuRender materials that are applied to elements in the Revit Architecture building model can be rendered in 3ds Max. After you make some minor adjustments to the materials, you add a daylight system and a sky to produce a more polished rendering.

Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Export to 3DS.rvt.

Export a Revit Architecture building model to a DWG file
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click To Building. The view of the building that you want to render in 3ds Max displays.

446 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

There are a few steps you can take to reduce the geometry and data in the model to make the export process more efficient. You can change the detail level of the view, use a section box to limit the view geometry, and turn off visibility of building elements. Because this building model is small, it is not necessary to use any of these options at this time.

2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. 3 In the Export dialog:

For Save in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Under File Naming, verify that Automatic and Long are selected. If these options are selected, a file name that consists of the dataset name appended with the view name automatically displays for the File Name.

Click Options.

4 In the Export Options dialog, under Solids (3D views only), select Export as ACIS solids, and click OK. The 3D elements in the building model will be exported as ACIS solids, or as 3D objects with multiple sides. If you select to export as polymesh, each element would be exported as an object made up of multiple polygons that are joined, or ''meshed'' together. When exporting to a DWG for use in Max, it is recommended that you export building models to DWG as ACIS solids. 5 In the Export dialog, click Save. 6 In the alert dialog, click OK to ignore the view crop boundary. The building model is exported to a DWG file in the Training location that you specified. 7 Minimize Revit Architecture but keep it open, as you modify the building model and reload it later in the tutorial. Next, link the file to a 3ds Max scene and render it. Link a DWG file to 3ds Max if you anticipate making changes to the building model that you want to reexport to 3ds Max. Import files when you want to export only one iteration of a design for use in 3ds Max.

Create a 3ds Max scene
8 Open 3ds Max, and if the Welcome screen displays, click Close. 9 Click File menu ➤ New. 10 In the New Scene dialog, select New All, and click OK. 11 Click Customize menu ➤ Units Setup.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 447

12 In the Units Setup dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Display Unit Scale, select US Standard. Verify Feet w/Fractional Inches is displayed. Under Lighting Units, select American. Click OK.

13 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the file as RAC Building.max.

Link the Revit Architecture building model to 3ds Max
14 Click File menu ➤ File Link Manager. 15 In the File Link Manager dialog, click the Presets tab. 16 Under Named Presets, select Revit, and click Modify. This preset contains the desired settings for linking Revit Architecture building models. 17 In the File Link Settings: DWG Files dialog, click the Advanced tab. 18 Verify Use scene material assignments on Reload is selected. This setting ensures that material changes that you make in 3ds Max will be preserved if you reload the DWG file. 19 Click Cancel. 20 In the File Link Manager, click the Attach tab, and click File. 21 In the Open dialog:

For Look in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Select c_Export_to_3DS.rvt-3DView-ToBuiliding.dwg, and click Open.

22 In the File Link Manager dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Preset, select Revit. Click the Attach tab. Click Select Layers to include. A dialog listing all the layers that were created when you exported the Revit Architecture building model to the DWG displays.

23 In the Select Layers dialog:
■ ■

Select Select from list. Scroll to view the layers, and verify that a check mark displays to the left of each layer name to indicate it is selected. In this tutorial, you want all the layers visible, but you can use this dialog control the layers that display in your 3ds Max scene.

Click OK.

24 In the File Link Manager, click Attach this file. 25 In the Proxy Object dialog, click Yes.

448 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

The file opens in the 3ds Max, and 4 different views of the building model display. Only the single camera position that created the 3d To Building view was exported with the Revit Architecture building model.

26 Close the File Link Manager.

Adjust a scene for rendering
27 On the bottom right of the screen, click in the Perspective viewport to set it current. The edges of the viewport are highlighted in yellow when the viewport is current. 28 In the top left corner of the viewport, right-click the Perspective viewport label, and click Views ➤ Camera: To Building.

29 Adjust the view:

■ ■

In the lower-right corner of the screen, click Click in the Camera: To Building viewport.

(Dolly Camera).

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 449

Press and hold the mouse button, and drag the cursor toward you until the view is adjusted as shown.

Render the scene

30 On the Main toolbar, click

(Quick Render).

The scene renders and the rendering displays in the Render window. There are a couple of adjustments that you want to make to the rendering, including the quality of the glass and stone materials. Because this is an exterior view, you also want to add a daylight system (a sun) and a sky in the background.

31 Close the render window. NOTE If you want to save any of your renderings as you progress through this tutorial, at the top of the render window, click .

450 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Improve the quality of the glass and stone materials in 3ds Max

32 On the Main toolbar, click

(Material Editor). (Get Material).

33 In the Material Editor, under the bottom left side of the material slots, click 34 On the left side of the Material/Map Browser, under Browse From, select Scene.

All of the materials applied to the Revit Architecture elements that were exported to the DWG file with the elements display in the right pane of the browser. 35 In the list of materials, select and drag Glass to one of the material slots at the top of the Material Editor.

36 In the Instance (Copy) Material dialog, verify Instance is selected, and click OK. 37 In the Material Editor, change the color of the glass:
■ ■ ■

Under Templates, select Glass - Clear. Under Physical Qualities, for Diffuse Color, click the color swatch. In the Color Selector, specify a golden brown color, and click Close.

38 Change the quality of the stone material on the retaining wall:

■ ■

In the Material Editor, select another slot, and click

(Pick Material from Object).

In the Camera: To Building viewport, move the cursor over the retaining wall and click to select it.

■ ■

In the Material Editor, under Templates, select Stone. Close the Material Editor and the Material Map Browser.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 451

Add a sun and sky
39 Click in the Top viewport and zoom out until you can see the entire building and the camera. 40 Click Create menu ➤ Lights ➤ Daylight System. 41 In the Daylight Object Creation dialog, click Yes.

42 In the Top viewport, to the right of the building, click and drag to place and size the compass rose. 43 Move the cursor down and to the right to place the sun.

44 On the right side of the screen, locate the Command panel and click 45 Under Daylight Parameters, under Position, click Setup. 46 Under Location, click Get Location. 47 In the Geographic Location list, select Boston, MA, and click OK. 48 Under Site, for North Direction, enter 250. 49 Under Time:
■ ■ ■

(Modify).

For Hours, enter 12. For Month, enter 7. For Day, enter 21.

452 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

For Year, enter 2007.

50 Click Rendering menu ➤ Environment, and verify that the Environment tab is displayed. 51 Under Common Parameters, and under Background, click the color swatch, and set the background color to a sky blue color.

Render the scene

52 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene Dialog).

53 At the bottom of the panel, for Viewport, select Camera: To Building, and click the lock that displays next to the selector. The lock lets you adjust the scene in other viewports (which become active as you use them), and then click Render to render the viewport you originally chose. When off, Render always renders the active viewport. 54 Under Output size, click 640 x 480. 55 Click the Advanced Lighting tab, and under Select Advanced Lighting, select <no lighting plug-in>. 56 Click Render. The scene is rendered and displays the adjustments you made to the glass and stone materials, as well as the addition of the daylight system and sky.

57 Click File menu ➤ Save. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max” on page 453.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you create and render 2 similar cutaway views of the building model. You use 2 different techniques to create the cutaway views. You create the first view in Revit Architecture using a section box to limit or ''cut away'' geometry from the building in the front of the To Building 3D view. You then export the geometry to the DWG file you created in a previous exercise, and reload it in the Autodesk 3ds Max scene. You learn how to use a section box to limit the building model geometry that you export, a technique that is useful and time-saving when exporting large building models.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 453

A cutaway view created by a section box in Revit Architecture and rendered in 3ds Max

After you create the first cutaway view, you create a similar view in 3ds Max by adjusting the visibility of the curtain wall elements so they are not visible to the camera, and then rendering the scene in the To Building viewport. Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt and RAC Building.max.

Create a Revit Architecture cutaway view
1 Maximize Revit Architecture. 2 In the 3D To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK. 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom Out.

454 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

A section box displays around the view.

5 Select the section box so that grips display. 6 Select and move the grips until a cutaway view displays as shown.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Reload the cutaway view in 3ds Max and render it
8 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max. 9 When the file is reloaded, render it again.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 455

Create a cutaway view in 3ds Max
10 Open Revit Architecture. 11 In the To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 12 To restore the view, in the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Section Box, and click OK. 13 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max.

14 In 3ds Max, on the Main toolbar, click

(Select Objects by Name).

15 At the top of the Select Objects dialog, enter curtain to select all the Curtain Wall Panel and Curtain Wall Mullion objects that display in the left side of the dialog. 16 At the bottom right of the dialog, click Select. The components of the curtains wall are selected. You will create a named selected set to control the camera’s visibility of these objects.

17 On the Main toolbar, click

(Edit Named Selection Sets).

18 In the Named Selection Sets dialog, click set name. 19 Close the Named Selection Sets dialog.

(Create New Set), and enter Curtain Wall for the selection

20 Right-click in the view, and click Object Properties. 21 In the Object Properties dialog, click the General tab. 22 Under Rendering Control, clear Visible to Camera, and click OK.

23 On the Main toolbar, click

.

A cutaway view, similar to the one that you created with the Revit Architecture section box displays. 24 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Daylight Analysis” on page 457.

456 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Creating a Daylight Analysis
In this exercise, you create a daylight analysis of the Revit Architecture building model in 3ds Max. The analysis will uses daylight levels in a specific location to display a spectrum of colors on the building model. The colors indicate the different levels of light incident on each building surface. The blue and green colors indicate low light levels, while the red, yellow, and orange colors indicate high levels of light. A daylight analysis can be a useful tool in determining the sustainability of your Revit Architecture building models.

Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt, and RAC Building.max. 1 In 3ds Max, click Rendering menu ➤ Environment. 2 In the Environment and Effects dialog, under Exposure Control, select Pseudo Color Exposure Control. Pseudo Color Exposure Control is a lighting analysis tool that provides you with an intuitive way of visualizing and evaluating the lighting levels in your scenes. It maps luminance or illuminance values to pseudo colors that show the brightness of the values being converted. 3 Under Pseudo Color Exposure Control:

Under Display Type, for Quantity, select Illuminance. Illuminance displays values of light incident on surfaces.

■ ■ ■ ■

For Style, select Colored. For Scale, select Logarithmic. Under Display Range, for Min., enter 100. For Max, enter 8000. The display range sets the lowest and highest values to represent in the rendering. Although this tutorial provides display range values, when you create your own daylight analysis you will probably want to test different display ranges to get the results that you want.

4 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene).

Creating a Daylight Analysis | 457

The scene renders and displays a true color rendering in the Render window. The 256 color daylight analysis is then created.

5 If desired, in the Render window, click 6 Save and close the 3ds Max scene. 7 Maximize Revit Architecture.

, and save the file.

8 Save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the file without saving it.

458 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Importing SketchUp Files

14

The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been imported, you can easily add detail with Revit components. In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.

After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building.

459

460 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass
In this exercise, you create a Revit Architecture project, and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project, and not in the library.

Create a Revit project
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog, click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter Import SketchUp, and click Save.

Import a SketchUp model
7 On the Design Bar, click the Massing tab. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Create Mass. 9 In the informational dialog, click OK. 10 In the Name dialog, enter SketchUp Model, and click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 12 In the Import/Link dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Training Files icon. Double-click the Common folder. For Files of type, select SketchUp Files. Click the Sketchup file, buildings.skp. Under Import or Link, for Layers, select All. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements, visible elements, or select from a list.

■ ■ ■

Under Layer/Level Colors, select Preserve colors. Under Positioning, select Manually place, and select Cursor at center. For Place at level, select Level 1. In a new project, Level 1 is the only choice. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from, depending on the complexity of the project.

Under Scaling, for Import units, select Auto-Detect.

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 461

You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information.

Click Open.

The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.

14 On the View toolbar, click

.

15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs. 17 In the warning dialog, click the Close button.

18 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Creating a Building from Mass Faces” on page 462.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces
In this exercise, you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. You turn their visibility off to view only the building.

462 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

After you create the building from the mass faces, you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.

Create roofs from mass faces
1 Zoom in to the front mass form, and on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 3 In the Type Selector, verify Basic Roof: Generic - 400mm displays. 4 On the Options Bar, for Level, verify Level 2 is selected. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass, and when the cursor displays a plus sign, select the face so that it highlights in red. The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign, indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.

6 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. To see the new roof, on the View toolbar, click to turn off mass visibility in the view. Click again to display masses.)

7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is selected. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 463

9 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view:

■ ■

On the View toolbar, click

.

In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin, and move the cursor in the drawing area until you can see the middle mass.

11 Right-click, and click Cancel to end the Spin command. 12 On the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

14 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof.

464 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

to turn off the mass visibility in the view. click . 22 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. for Loc Line. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. click Wall by Face. select Core Face: Exterior. 20 In the Type Selector. 21 On the Options Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the mass form. click Modify to end the command. verify Basic Wall: Generic . Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 465 . 19 On the Design Bar.200mm displays.15 On the Design Bar. click you created. and display only the roofs that 17 Click again to redisplay the masses.

create the 2 curtain systems shown below.23 On the View toolbar. Create curtain systems from mass faces 25 On the Design Bar. 29 Using the same technique. 24 Click to redisplay the masses. 27 Select the left face of the left mass. click Create System. click Curtain System. 26 In the Type Selector. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 466 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . click to view only the walls and roofs. 28 On the Options Bar.

Create a roof from a mass face 33 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. click Roof by Face. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. and adjust the view so you can see the back of the mass forms. 32 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. click Create Roof. and select it.30 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 467 . and on the Options Bar. click . TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. select the other wall. Create walls from mass faces 31 On the Design Bar. 34 Select the mass face shown below.

Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 35 On the Design Bar. 36 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. click to view the building that you have created. click Wall by Face. and select the mass face shown below. 38 On the View toolbar. click Curtain System. 39 Click to redisplay the masses. click Create System. 468 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . Create the final wall 37 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar.

The perspective view created by the camera displays. specify a point for the camera target. 44 On the View toolbar. and curtain systems that make up your building Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 469 . 43 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. 41 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. as shown. Below the right corner of the view. In the far left corner of the building that you created. roofs. specify a point to place the camera. 42 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera.Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 40 In the Project Browser. to view only the walls. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. click in the view.

Click the frame to display its grips. Under Grid 1 Pattern. select Center. click 47 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Change the justification of the curtain systems 45 On the Design Bar. 48 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view.You may need to resize the view again. 46 On the Options Bar. click . select Center. for Justification. 470 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . and select the left curtain system in the view. Under Grid 2 Pattern. click Modify. for Justification. Modify the roofs 49 On the Views toolbar. Click OK.

verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. 52 In the Project Browser. and move the roof edges as shown below. click . and adjust the view so you can see the front of the building. 55 On the View toolbar. 58 Add doors to the building as shown below. click Door. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 471 . Add doors to the building 54 In the Project Browser. 57 In the Type Selector. double-click {3D}. and click Cancel to end the command. under 3D Views. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 51 Right-click.50 Select each roof to display its grips. 53 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 56 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views.

59 Save and close the drawing. 472 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .

Creating Families 6 473 .

474 | Chapter 15 Creating Families .

they are still related and come from a single source. each with a different size. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. thus the term family. shape. 475 .About Families and the Family Editor 15 All elements in Revit Architecture 2008 are “family based. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. material set. In this tutorial. Even though various types within a family can look completely different.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Architecture to help you manage your data and make changes easily. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it.

This makes file management much easier. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components.rfa extension. transfer them from one project to another. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . for example. foundation. trees. Host-based families have components that require hosts. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. while many more are stored in component libraries. floors. The basic walls system family. Using the Family Editor. and furniture. floors. You also learn about the Family Editor. For example. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. exterior. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. generic.rfa extension. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. and partition wall styles. 476 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . Revit Architecture has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and comprise principle building components such as walls. Standalone families include columns. Walls. and roofs are examples of these types of families. because there is only one file to track. You can load them into projects. however. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. such as a dome roof. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. There are. but you cannot create new system families. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . Family templates are either host-based or standalone. and roofs. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. and when and how to use it. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Architecture is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. In this lesson. In addition. has wall types that define interior. exceptions to this rule. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Architecture recognize it as a particular component type. and save them from a project file to your library if needed.

as well as the level of detail associated with that view. 2 On the File menu. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. To add a family to your project. how to access it. for example. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. such as plan. it is saved with the project.The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. You create in-place families only within the current project. if you change the original family. In the final exercise. custom wall treatments. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. and when to use it. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. you learn about the Family Editor. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. Introduction to the Family Editor | 477 . you learned about the different types of Revit Architecture families and when to use them. However. In this section. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. After the family has been loaded in the project. and also a standalone furniture family component. elevation. you can drag it into the document window. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. or you can load it using the Load From Library. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. Load Family command on the File menu. or 3D.

and click Open. you learn when to use the Family Editor. how to access it. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. consider checking the web library and other web resources. it opens within the Family Editor. you can click File ➤ Open. you can double-click any file with an . and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. if you have exhausted your external resources. With Revit Architecture open. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. Within the Windows® environment. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. In this case. 9 Save the newly-defined family. When the family opens.rfa extension and it will open Revit Architecture in the Family Editor. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. and click Open. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. presume it is a bay window that you require. open it in the Family Editor. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. navigate to a family file. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. To start a new family. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. If you find a close match. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. 478 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. select the appropriate template. such as newsgroups. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. and then load it into the project. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior.In this exercise. modify it as needed. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 3 Next. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. 5 Finally. it should be available within the Type Selector.

a lighting fixture. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. You create a furniture family. In each lesson. you learn how to create specific Revit Architecture 2008 families. and several annotation families. 479 . When you create an in-place family. Using the installed templates. you learn how to create a different type of component. not within the Family Editor.Creating Components in the Family Editor 16 In this tutorial. you create an in-place family. you create it within the project file. In addition. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project.

fill patterns. Step 5: Dimension the reference planes and create parameters. There can be more than one closed loop in the sketch but they must not touch or intersect each other. it automatically cuts the solid. Step 7: Add 2 or more types in the Family Types dialog with different values for the parameters. Blend. There are four different methods to create Solid geometry and/or Void geometry in the Family Design Bar: Extrusion. Base and Top. build geometry. materials. Step 8: Test (flex) the family: switch between the types. 480 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . create different host types for testing purposes. both of which must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. When you are in sketch mode. The first line of the path defines the work plane for the profile. continue to incrementally add reference planes. Subcategories are used to define visibility settings. line patterns. line colors. switch between the different host types. Step 9: Create a single level of 2D and 3D geometry and lock it to the selected reference planes.Creating 3D Geometry All tools for creating 3D geometry can be accessed in the Family Design Bar. Sweep: A sweep contains two sketches: a 2D Path that can be a closed or open. lineweight settings. Solids and Voids are sketch based. use the Cut Geometry tool to create the cut. If you place the void before you add the solid. Step 6: If the selected family template is a host-based template. You can unjoin solids or cancel the cutting of a void on a solid using commands available on the Tools toolbar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Join Geometry Unjoin Geometry Cut Geometry Don’t Cut Process Overview: Creating a Family Follow this best practice process for creating a family: Step 1: Select a family template. The sketches must not touch or intersect each other. Step 4: Create the skeleton of the family by adding reference planes in all required views. and Sweep. if the family includes a host. Step 2: Define additional subcategories. The sample below shows a start angle of 0° and an end angle of 180°. Step 10: Repeat the flex procedure until reasonably complete. and test after each step. ■ Extrusion: The sketch for an extrusion must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. ■ ■ ■ When a void is placed on a solid. To quit the sketch mode. and a Profile that must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. You can also join the geometry of different solids with the Join Geometry tool. you can no longer select or modify an element that is not in the sketch. Revolve: The sketch for a revolved object must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. Step 11: Test the family in a project environment. Blend: A blend contains two sketches. Each sketch is set to a different height. and export settings for selected geometry. Step 3: Use the Element Properties dialog to define the reference planes that represent the origin of the family. The start and end angles of the revolution can be defined in the Revolution properties. Note that no geometry is created. and pin those reference planes. if required. tests at this point ensure that the skeleton of the family works correctly. Revolve. click Finish Sketch on the Design bar.

The floor plan Ref. You have created a new furniture family. 6 Select the horizontal reference plane named Center (Front/Back). select both reference planes. 4 Navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. Select a family template 1 Close all open projects or families. and click OK. You can control which reference planes are used as origin in the Element Properties dialog. You should name reference planes to easily identify them in all views. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane above the existing horizontal reference plane.Defining the Origin of a Family The intersection of 2 reference planes in a view defines the origin and the insertion point of a family in a project. The intersection of these reference planes now defines the origin and the insertion point of the family in plan view. and click Open. you define the skeleton of the family with reference planes in plan and elevation views before you create geometry. The furniture family in this lesson has the shape of two boxes. and on the Options Bar. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Level is open. and create one below. and the family contains 2 reference planes in this floor plan. 3 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the existing vertical reference plane. 8 Using the same method. click 7 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Edit toolbar. verify that Defines Origin is selected for the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. therefore new reference planes are required in plan and elevation views. NOTE The direction of the reference planes is not important. click Training Files. select Metric Furniture. verify that Other ➤ Defines Origin is selected. and create one to the right.rft. Defining the Origin of a Family | 481 . click to pin the reference planes. click Ref Plane. Adding Reference Planes Next. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. . 5 While pressing CTRL. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.

You name reference planes so that you can identify them in different views. click .4 Click Modify. 482 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. enter Left. for Identity Data ➤ Name. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Name reference planes 5 Select the left reference plane and. on the Options Bar.

These behave the same as strong references. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. for Other ➤ Is Reference. These are predefined system priorities that define a direction (for example. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes Revit Architecture includes several predefined priorities that you can apply to a reference plane. Weak Reference Strong Reference Directional References According to these rules. click . Front. define the priorities of the reference planes you have created. When you dimension a family and a strong and a weak reference are close together. the strong reference is always captured first. and on the Options Bar. select Left. left. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. use Left for the Is Reference value.7 Using the same method. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. top). If a reference plane defines the left edge of a family. Is Reference Value Not a Reference Definition The reference plane can be used in a family. right. but cannot be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. The priority is specified as the Is Reference value in the Element Properties dialog for the reference plane. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes | 483 . The reference allows minor strength snapping. and click OK. 1 Select the Left reference plane. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. The reference does not snap and shows no shape handles. name the other reference planes Right. as shown. The reference plane allows minor strength snapping. and Back.

select Dimensions. Note that the Length parameter has been added to the dimension string. 484 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and Back). enter Length. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 1 Dimension the horizontal reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. specify the Is Reference value to correspond to the name of each reference plane (Right. 2 Dimension the vertical reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. Click the temporary dimension. Repeat for the other reference plane. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. for Label. and Height as parameters of the furniture family.3 Using the same method. for Name. Click OK. enter 750mm. 5 Click Modify. and press ENTER. Front. select Add Parameter. and click above the planes to place the dimension. enter 300mm. Repeat for the other reference plane. We want drive Length. 6 Select the dimension line. Width. For Group parameter under. Dimensioning Reference Planes The dimension controls the behavior of the location of reference planes. and press ENTER. Click the temporary dimension. click Dimension. The dimension can have a fixed value or can be driven by a parameter. 4 Select the Left reference plane and the Right reference plane.

and click the EQ symbol above the dimension. click to place the dimension. dimension the horizontal reference planes. click Dimension.9 Using the same method. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 485 . 12 Using the same method. Add a multi-segment dimension 10 On the Design Bar. 11 Click each of the vertical reference planes. dimension the outer horizontal reference planes with the Width parameter.

14 Create 2 horizontal reference planes and 2 vertical reference planes within the existing outer reference planes. 16 While pressing CTRL. you need to specify the Is Reference values. name them Base Left. and click OK. Now the reference planes can be used in the family. select Not a Reference. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 50mm for the left temporary dimension. for Other ➤ Is Reference. and Base Back. 15 Using the Element Properties dialog. and press ENTER. 486 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Because the base planes should not be used as a reference for dimensions or alignments. Base Front.Add base reference planes 13 On the Design Bar. Base Right. click Ref Plane. 18 Click the Base Left reference plane. Position and dimension the 4 new reference planes with a fixed distance from the outer reference planes. but do not appear in the project. and click . click the base reference planes.

21 Select the Left and Base Left reference planes. 20 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and lock the dimension.19 Using the same method. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 487 . position the remaining new reference planes.

Next. For Identity Data ➤ Name. and section views.22 Using the same method. and lock the dimensions. and click 27 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . you add a reference plane and the Height parameter of the family in the Front view. dimension all other reference planes for the base with the outer reference planes. 488 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Not a Reference. the family contains a level and a reference plane that defines the origin of the family in the elevation view. 24 On the Design Bar. 28 Change the lower temporary dimension to 150mm. 25 Create 2 horizontal reference planes above the existing horizontal reference plane. 23 In the Project Browser. You can dimension reference planes in plan. under Elevations. double-click Front. Click OK. Make sure that you use consistent views to add dimensions. Under Is Reference. The front view displays. 26 Select the middle reference plane. By default. elevation. click Ref Plane. enter Base Bottom.

30 With the top reference plane still selected. and click to place the dimension. The basic skeleton of the furniture family is completed. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 489 . Click OK. select Dimensions. enter Height. click Dimension. 32 On the Design Bar. select Add Parameter. 33 Select the lower reference plane and the Base Bottom reference plane. on the Options Bar. you create 2 types of the family in the Family Types dialog. for Label.29 Select the top reference plane and change the temporary dimension to 1450mm.rfa. Click OK. 36 Click Modify. click 31 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 35 Dimension the lower reference plane and the Top reference plane. enter Top. 34 Lock the dimension. navigate to Training/Metric/Families. select Top. and save the file as Cabinet. In the next exercise. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. Under Group parameter under. 38 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. for Name. For Identity Data ➤ Name. Under Is Reference. 37 Select the last dimension added.

Note that the name of the type you have created is displayed in the Name selection box at the top of the dialog. but no geometry has been added. and click OK. parameters. 5 Using the same method. enter 1800. clicking OK adjusts the geometry and closes the dialog. enter 600 x 1500 x 1600. 10 Click Apply. under Family Types. each type is represented with selected parameters. 9 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2000. click New. for Height. 6 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. under Floor plans. for Name. enter 800. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. the types defined in the family editor appear in the project. 8 Using the same method. click Family Types. Family types allow you to predefine variations of a family. for Width. enter 2800. click in the titlebar of the Family Types dialog and drag it so that both the dialog and the drawing area are visible. 7 Click Apply. Note that the reference planes and the dimensions adjust according to the entered values.Managing Family Parameters and Family Types Parameters and their values can be managed in the Family Types dialog. create a new type named 800 x 1000 x 1800. For Length. Best practice is to perform the first tests when the reference planes. NOTE In the Family Types dialog. Family types are also a good way to test your family for correct behavior. For Length. 11 Click OK. create a new type named 1000 x 2000 x 2800. check the family as often as possible by switching between different types. Level. double-click Ref. When a family is loaded in a project. for Width. 4 In the Name dialog. for Height. NOTE In order to see changes applied to the reference planes. 490 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and dimensions are specified. 3 In the Family Types dialog. enter 1000. enter 1000. clicking Apply adjusts the geometry without closing the dialog.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Lock geometry to reference planes | 491 . Creating Geometry In this lesson. you use extrusions to model the solid geometry of a cabinet family. create an extrusion from the plan view. Locking edges of solid/void forms: In elevation view. Make sure that you have set an appropriate work plane when you create 2D or 3D geometry in your family. and click Edit Work Plane on the Options bar. Reference planes have the ability to define a work plane if they are named. 2 On the Design Bar. there is an option on the Sketch tab of the Design Bar to Set Work Plane. double-click Ref. you access the Work Plane dialog by clicking (Plane) on the Tools toolbar. The Family Editor offers multiple tools to set a work plane current: Define a work plane before adding geometry: Using the Work Plane dialog. Creating Solid Forms Use the simplest form to create solid geometry for a furniture family. Define a work plane in sketch mode: While in sketch mode. select the geometry. where you can define the plane. In that case. You constrain the extrusions to the reference planes you created in previous exercises. you only need to lock the top and bottom edges of the solid geometry. A work plane is a planar surface on which you can add sketch lines or others components.Lock geometry to reference planes Locking sketch lines: Lines of a sketch can be locked to a reference plane in plan view to ensure that the edge of the solid is maintained if the dimension of the reference plane changes. Sketch an extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. Because you lock the planar edges in plan view. Change a work plane for existing geometry: You can also use the Work Plane dialog to change the work plane for existing geometry in a drawing. This option will display the Work Plane dialog. you can select a named reference plane or define a work plane by picking a plane or a line in the drawing area before you sketch geometry. edges of a solid form can also be locked to reference planes. Defining Work Planes Any solid/void form is created on a work plane. Level. In such an instance. under Floor Plans.

the extrusion is changed accordingly in plan view. NOTE Only sketch directly on the desired reference planes when the situation is clearly arranged. click . When the parameters Length and Width change. You can use the Align tool to align the sketch lines with the desired reference planes. An example of sketch lines drawn off of reference planes An example of sketch lines aligned on the desired reference plane 492 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The sketch of the extrusion is now locked to the outer reference planes in plan view. When the setup is more complex. 4 Sketch the rectangle directly on the outer reference planes.3 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Sketch tab. with multiple reference planes or when you need to sketch with the Line tool. do not sketch directly on the reference planes. 5 Lock each line of the sketch with the reference plane. click Finish Sketch.

Adjust extrusion height 7 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Options Bar. click (Align). 10 Lock the dimension. Creating Solid Forms | 493 . under Elevations. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. NOTE You can also drag the top edge of the solid geometry with the extrusion shape handle to the top reference plane and lock it. double-click Front. 9 Select the Top reference plane as the alignment reference.

double-click Ref. Create the base geometry 12 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. The base should display only in elevation and 3D views. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 18 On the Tools toolbar. 23 Save the file. 19 Select the Base Bottom reference plane as the alignment reference. under View Specific Display. click . and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. double-click Front.11 Align the bottom of the extrusion to the Base Bottom reference plane and lock the dimension. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Visibility. 13 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and lock all the sketch lines with the reference planes. click . Level. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. 20 Click Modify. under Floor Plans. 15 Sketch the rectangle directly on the reference planes for the base (the inner reference planes). 494 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 21 Click the base geometry and on the Options Bar. clear Plan/RCP. under Elevations. click Finish Sketch.

and lock the geometry. 12 In the Family Types dialog. The lines are greyed out. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 3 On the View Control Bar. 14 On the View Control Bar. and section views of the family. click Family Types. Click Modify. the lines need to appear in medium and fine detail levels. click Visibility. The family geometry should change each time you apply a different type. clear Coarse. They are view direction specific. 8 While pressing CTRL. but not in coarse. 9 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. For the furniture family. Hiding the existing solid geometry before you create the symbolic lines helps you create the lines on the intersections of the reference planes. 2 While pressing CTRL. lines need to be added as symbolic illustration in plan views. 7 Draw a symbolic line from the lower left corner to the top right corner. 13 Click OK. 5 On the Options Bar. There are 2 methods for adding 2D geometry available from the Family tab of the Design Bar: Model lines: these can be added in all views. and click OK. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. the software automatically creates the correct plan. 6 Draw a line from the top left corner of the reference planes to the lower right corner. they show only in views that are parallel to their creation view. elevation. 4 On the Design Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. select a different family type. Symbolic lines: these can be added in plan. elevation. under Floor plans. and section views. and lock the geometry. NOTE You have to exit Symbolic Line mode to lock the geometry. For example. double-click Ref. 1 In the Project Browser. Model lines and symbolic lines can also be constrained to reference planes.Creating 2D Geometry You can create families using 3D and 2D geometry. Level. use model lines to display additional lines in the 3D view of the family. under Detail Levels. When you use 3D geometry. click Symbolic Lines. on the Options Bar. 10 On the View Control Bar. Test the family 11 On the Design Bar. verify that the Line tool is active. and click Apply. as the current displayed detail level is Coarse. select both lines and. The lines display again. By design. and click the locks to create the constraint. Creating 2D Geometry | 495 . select the symbolic line. select the base geometry and the furniture geometry.

The geometry of the furniture family is complete. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. set a 3D view of the family current. 2 On the View Control Bar. Before you save the family. Loading a Family into a Project Families can be loaded directly from the family editor into selected open projects. 496 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The last view creates the thumbnail view of the family. 3 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 5 Save the file. double-click View 1. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Save View. This opens a predefined 3D view. under 3D views. Save a 3D view 1 In the Project Browser.

7 Click Window menu ➤ Cabinet. 9 In the Project Browser. drag each of the types into the drawing area. Creating a Door Family | 497 . click (3D). under Cabinet. you can create additional types with different dimensions in a project. this view is maintained when the family is opened again.rfa 3D View: View 1 to switch to the family. and click to place them. expand Families ➤ Furniture ➤ Cabinet. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. 12 On the Views toolbar.NOTE If you save the family in a 3D view different than the default {3D} view and if you have saved the orientation of your view. Create a project 6 On the Standard toolbar. You can press SPACE to change the orientation of the type. click . 10 In the Project Browser. 13 Close all open projects or families. The family is loaded into the new project. 11 Click Modify. All the family types you created are listed as options. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Door Family In this lesson. If required. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. click Load into Projects.

rft. Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. height. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. The door type has a variable height and width. and thickness. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door.You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. 498 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise.

Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 9 In the Type Selector. Floor Plan: Ref. and represent the door opening profile. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 499 . Labelled dimensions. select Doors [projection]. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. 7 Enter ZF. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening.4 On the View menu. 5 On the Window menu. click Tile. are also displayed. Notice the four tiled views. 6 Maximize the window. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. click . click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Level. click Symbolic Lines. part of the door properties.

14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown. 500 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.

Because labelled dimensions are parameters. click Modify. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 501 . 17 On the Options Bar.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. select Thickness for Label. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. select Width for Label. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. 19 On the Options Bar. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly.

click the down arrow button. and select the command from the menu. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. In the image below. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. When drawing an arc from center and end points. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. select Plan Swing [cut].Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. click Symbolic Lines. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. along with the witness line controls. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. as shown. 502 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 22 In the Type selector. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. click . then you specify each end point. 24 Enter SI. you first specify the arc center.

click Lines. under Elevations. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 503 . 2 On the Design Bar. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. and click . and click OK. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 503. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. double-click Exterior. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. enter 50 mm for Depth. click Set Work Plane. 6 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 3 On the Design Bar.

8 On the Design Bar. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. then click to specify the dimension witness line. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. 504 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Left. click Finish Sketch. 10 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.

Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 505 . 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. under View Specific Display. and click OK. double-click Ref.12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Left/Right. Medium. and When cut in Plan/RCP. and clear Plan/RCP. under Floor Plans. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. select Front/Back. 19 Under Detail Levels. verify that Coarse. select Thickness for Label. click Visibility. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. click Modify and select the dimension. 17 On the Options Bar. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. Level. and Fine are selected.

and click OK. click . 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click OK. under Name.20 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Materials dialog. for Material. under Materials and Finishes. enter Oak Door for Name. click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Materials dialog. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 506. click . 7 In the Materials dialog.Red/Stained. for Material. and click OK. click 17 In the Materials dialog. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. click Duplicate. click OK. and click OK. under AccuRender.No Gloss. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. you assign a material to the door leaf. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. 6 Click OK. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. click Materials. click for Texture. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. select Panel for Subcategory. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click 11 In the Materials dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Oak Door. 9 On the Options Bar. 506 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 In the Material Library dialog. and click OK. 3 In the New Material dialog. click . The solid geometry of the door is now complete. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. It also defines its appearance when rendered. select Oak Door for Name.Dark.

and select Shading with Edges. under 3D Views. click the Model Graphics Style control. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. double-click View 1. under Views (all). 21 On the View Control Bar. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser.The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 507 .

Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. 3 In the Name dialog. 28 Proceed to the next exercise.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click OK. Under Other. Click Apply. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. Under Other. Click Apply. Try to move the dialog off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. 508 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 2 In the Family Types dialog. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. enter 2000 mm for Height. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. “Defining New Door Types” on page 508 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. click New. click Family Types. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. enter 2500 mm for Height. 24 On the Design Bar. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. under Family Types. 27 Click OK. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog and see how the new door reacts. 25 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1000 mm for Width. click Family Types. By flexing the new component. In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1500 mm for Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Save. Enter 1220 mm for Width.rfa. enter 2000 mm for Height. Defining New Door Types | 509 . click Load. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.4 In the Family Types dialog. 11 Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 12 On the File menu. select Project. Click Apply. 5 Under Family Types. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 6 In the Name dialog. 17 Under Create new. Define the second new door type. 9 In the Name dialog. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. Click Apply. enter 2100 mm for Height. 10 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. and click OK. Define the third new door type. 20 In the Open dialog.rte. Enter 750 mm for Width. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. 15 In the New Project dialog.rfa. enter 2134 mm for Height. click New. and click OK. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. Training Door. Training Door. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Wall. click Door. under Template file. 19 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Family Types dialog. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. select it. and click Open. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. click New. click New ➤ Project. click Browse. and click OK. 8 Under Family Types. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. Enter 925 mm for Width. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name.

27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. 24 On the View Control Bar. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. click Door. 26 In the Type Selector. click . 28 In the Type Selector.23 On the View toolbar. and select Shading with Edges. 510 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. 25 On the Design Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control.

you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm.30 In the Type Selector. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. and mullion offset. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. glazing and mullions as extrusions. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. This completes the lesson. and create the window sash as a sweep. 32 You can close all files without saving. and specify values for the window width. Finally. Creating a Door Family. height. You create the window frame. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. default sill height. Creating a Window Family | 511 .

2 On the File menu. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. is one of the type parameters. Height and Default Sill Height. 512 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 Enter ZF. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. The window type has a variable height and width. equally spaced vertical mullions. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. When you add labels to dimensions. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. 6 Two dimension strings display with their labels. 4 Maximize the Elevation: Exterior view. click Training Files. The label name. you specify the parameters for the new window family. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit.rft. click New ➤ Family. also one of the window properties.

” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 513. Click Apply. then sketching the sweep profile. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 4 On the Options Bar. Snap the cursor to each corner. 8 In the Family Types dialog. enter 1300 mm for Height. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. Enter 1800 mm for Width. and click Apply. Change the height and width values again. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window opening. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 513 . 10 Click OK. This is the starting point for the new window. 2 On the Design Bar. click Family Types.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 7 On the Design Bar. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. and click Apply. This process is called “flexing the model. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. click Lines. click Sketch 2D Path. Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. 9 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. click .

7 On the Design Bar. click the Scale control. click Sketch Profile. 514 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 12 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 13 On the Options Bar. and specify an offset of 50 mm.6 Click the locks so the sweep is locked to the opening size. select Elevation: Right. 9 In the Go To View dialog. and select 1:10. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 8 On the Design Bar. 10 On the View Control Bar. click . and click Open View. click Finish Path. 11 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. 14 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane.

and select the dimension. 24 On the Options Bar. Sketch the window frame profile 23 On the Design Bar. 25 Below the red dot. select Chain and click . click Modify. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. 19 Drag the value control off to the side as shown.15 On the Design Bar. click . select Prefer: Wall faces. click Dimension. click Lines. under Identity Data. 17 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. 20 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 515 . 16 On the Options Bar. enter Sash for the Name. 21 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and click OK. and select the reference plane. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the Design Bar.

the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. When the lock displays. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. 516 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . When the lock displays. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. and drag it to the interior face of the wall.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. 28 Select the left edge of the frame section. However. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. 26 On the Design Bar. the exact dimensions are not critical. click Modify. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. 27 Select the right edge of the frame section.

31 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 517 . click Modify. and specify the dimension value. click Dimension. 30 On the Design Bar. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. as shown. select the line you want to move. When the lock displays. TIP After adding the dimension. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane.29 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane.

When the lock displays. Next. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. zoom out until it displays. this is the top of the window opening. When the lock displays. click the lock to constrain the present value. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. 518 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Finish Sweep. 36 On the Design Bar. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. click . 37 On the Design Bar. click Finish Profile.Modify each dimension if necessary. 33 Select the 20 mm dimension. 34 On the Tools toolbar. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 32 Select the 40 mm dimension. click the lock to constrain the present value.

40 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click View 1. click Set Work Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. If necessary. click Lines. expand 3D Views. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. and click OK. and enter . and select the option.The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Project Browser. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. under Specify a new Work Plane. Chain of walls or lines. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 519. under Elevations. and select Lock. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 519 . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.45 mm for Depth. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. 38 In the Project Browser. click . 3 In the Work Plane dialog. under Views (all). double-click Exterior.

The entire sash outline is selected. set the following options: Click . Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. 520 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . ■ ■ Enter . 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. click Finish Sketch. 9 On the Design Bar. You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame.50 mm for Offset. and lock icons display on each line. ■ Click . and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle.

Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 521 . you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. The window sash extrusion is now complete. under Elevations. double-click Right.10 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. 11 In the Project Browser. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 521. under 3D Views.

double-click Right.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 522 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. under Elevations. 2 On the Design Bar. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. and enter 30 mm for Offset. 3 On the Options Bar. as shown. click . click Ref Plane.

under Elevations. 16 On the Options Bar. enter -12 mm for Depth.5 On the Design Bar. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. click . 13 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and select Lock. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Specify a new Work Plane. under Identity Data. and click OK. click Modify. click . 11 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the reference plane. and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Work Plane dialog. 15 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 9 On the Options Bar. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 523 . 17 Select each of the sash extrusion lines to create the glass boundary. double-click Exterior. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter.

specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. 23 On the Design Bar. View the window model with frame. 524 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . After the family is loaded into a project. double-click Right. 21 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch.18 On the Design Bar. sash. under Elevations. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog. click Modify. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. click . under Identity Data. 20 Select the glass extrusion. and click OK.

enter 1500 mm for Height. Under Other. Move the Family Types dialog off to the side so you can see the window model. click Family Types. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.24 In the Project Browser. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. double-click View 1. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 525 . For example. Click Apply. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. 26 In the Family Types dialog. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. NOTE After flexing the model. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. under 3D Views. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles.

under Elevations. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. 526 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . NOTE When you draw each reference plane. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. 28 On the Edit toolbar.27 Click Cancel. the exact location is not critical. double-click Exterior. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. click Ref Plane. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Design Bar. click to return the window to its original dimensions. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 526. click Dimension.

Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values. Do not be concerned with dimension values. click Modify. as shown. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 527 . Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. as shown. After adding the dimension. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal.

Select Instance. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog.> for Label. select Family parameter. and click OK. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. enter Mullion Offset for Name. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. 528 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Dimensions.9 On the Options Bar.. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. Under Parameter Data. click Family Types. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type.. under Dimensions. select <Add parameter. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. Under Group parameter under. Click OK.

23 On the Options Bar. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. and click . under Specify a new Work Plane. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar.14 Click the dimension value. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. enter 14 mm for Depth. move the dimension value as shown. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. 18 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 529 . and enter 350 mm as the new value. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. and click OK. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. 17 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. As you did before. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. However. click Modify. select Mullion Offset for Label. click Set Work Plane. 22 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 21 In the Work Plane dialog.

After you complete the sketch. Move the dimension values as shown. click Dimension. 26 On the Design Bar. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. 530 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal.

click Modify. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. Under Parameter Data. Under Group parameter under.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. Select Type. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. 30 On the Options Bar. select Dimensions. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 531 . select <Add parameter> for Label. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 29 On the Design Bar. select Family parameter. Click OK. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. enter Mullion Width for Name.

click Family Types. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. click Finish Sketch. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Select the dimension. 532 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. This is changed in later steps. and click Apply. select Mullion Width for Label. and on the Options Bar. Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. 35 In the Family Types dialog. Remember. 33 On the Design Bar. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area.

Under Other. 38 On the Edit toolbar. evenly spaced. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog. click to return the window to its original dimensions. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. 40 On the Design Bar. 37 Click Cancel. and aligned with the sash edge. click Set Work Plane. or undoing the same. Enter 1500 mm for Width. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. enter 1500 mm for Height. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. 41 In the Work Plane dialog. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Click Apply. In this case. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height.Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 39 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 533 . and the mullions stretch with the new window height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. under Specify a new Work Plane. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. NOTE After flexing the model. and click OK.

43 On the Options Bar. 46 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. 534 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 47 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. click Dimension. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. click Modify. 45 On the Design Bar. click Lines.42 On the Design Bar. 44 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. as shown. 49 On the Design Bar. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. click . and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. click Dimension. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 48 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion.

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 535 . 51 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. Move the dimension value as shown. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. Select the dimension. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. and on the Options Bar. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Remember. select Mullion Width for Label.50 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ 52 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Mullion Width for Label.

click Join Geometry. 54 Select the horizontal mullions. under 3D Views. double-click View 1.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. 536 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Join the mullion geometry 53 On the Tools menu. and select the vertical mullions. If necessary. 55 In the Project Browser. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions.

Flex the window model 56 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 1500 mm for Height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Click Apply. 58 In the Family Types dialog. you can still see the window. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 537 . 59 Click Cancel. Under Other. click Family Types. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. 57 On the Design Bar. so when you open the Family Types dialog.Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height.

under Elevations. click the Model Graphics Style control. click to return the window to its original dimensions.60 On the Edit toolbar. click Duplicate. 8 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. Dark. enter Pine Frame for Name. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 538. 5 In the Material Library dialog. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. click for Texture. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Materials dialog. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. click Materials. 538 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under AccuRender. and the mullions. click OK. Yellow/. 2 In the Materials dialog. 6 In the Materials dialog. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. 9 Select the window frame sweep. sash. sash. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. and click OK. double-click Exterior. 3 In the New Material dialog. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. and select Shading with Edges. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. No Gloss. you assign materials to the frame. the sash. select Stained. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

double-click Right. select Pine Frame for Name. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. under Graphics. clear the other view options. verify that Coarse. and Fine are selected. click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. 16 Under Detail Levels. click for Material. 13 In the Materials dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and Fine are selected. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 539 . Medium. under View Specific Display. 23 Under Detail Levels. 20 Select the glass extrusion. click . select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). verify that Coarse. 24 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. and click OK. select Edit for Visibility. and click OK.10 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. Medium. under View Specific Display. click Modify. click Visibility. double-click View 1.

26 Proceed to the next exercise.25 Zoom in on a window corner. “Defining New Window Types” on page 540. and glass display their assigned materials. 540 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The window frame. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. mullions. sash. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project.

Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog. In the Family Types dialog. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. Defining New Window Types | 541 . The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. click Family Types. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. and click Apply. 2 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. 3 In the Family Types dialog. verify that 2000 mm is specified for Height.

enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. Click Apply. 542 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Family Types. and click OK. 5 In the Family Types dialog. click New. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog. enter 1000 mm for Height. verify that the following parameter values are specified: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. 7 In the Name dialog. 8 In the Family Types dialog.The window height is doubled. Enter 1250 mm for Height. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. and click Apply.

11 In the Family Types dialog. click Save. 19 On the Options Bar.rfa. Defining New Window Types | 543 . 10 In the Name dialog. 15 On the File menu. click Load. click to start a new project based on your default template. click New.9 Under Family Types. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Family Types dialog. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. Enter 1300 mm for Height. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. Click Apply. Training Window. and click OK. Click Apply. Click OK. click New. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. click Window. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. Enter 1500 mm for Height. 13 In the Name dialog.

click Window. 27 In the Type Selector. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. 544 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 35 On the View Control Bar.20 In the Open dialog. click Wall. 32 On the View menu. 23 On the Design Bar. select it. and click Open. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. Notice the detail that displays. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. 24 On the Options Bar. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 29 In the Type Selector. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. 34 On the View toolbar. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. and select Shading with Edges. 31 On the Design Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control.rfa file. navigate to the location of your Training Window. click Thin Lines. clear Tag on Placement. 33 Zoom in on the center window. click . 25 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h.

You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. Instance parameter means. where type parameters drive the geometry for each family type. that each family in a project can have a different value for an instance parameter. Basically. and symbolic lines are usually assigned to selected Subcategories. Parameters: You should carefully define the parameters in a family. model lines. line colors. Solid Revolve. elevation. The window family includes nested families for the outer sill and uses shared parameters for evaluation purposes. a parameter drives geometry in a family. Solid Blend. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. where symbolic lines are view direction specific: they show only in views that are parallel to the view where they have been created. sketch. You can also switch on/off selected subcategories in a project. Planning a Complex Model Family Before you start to create a complex model family. A large number of parameters reduce the performance of the family. you should sketch the design of the family and make notes of the desired behavior: ■ Subcategories: Solid geometry. This allows you to drive lineweights. line patterns. Revit Architecture allows you to specify a parameter as instance or type parameter. and section views of a family. ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a Complex Model Family | 545 . Model lines are displayed in every view. the easiest way to create a window frame is to create an extrusion including two rectangles for the frame edges in an elevation view of the family. For example. Solid geometry: Use solid geometry as often as possible to represent a family because it automatically gives you the correct plan. you plan. Solid Sweep) you can decide in which view you start to create your solid geometry. Creating a Complex Model Family In the following exercises. Formulas between parameters drive the behavior of parts of the family. and materials of the subcategories. Creating solid geometry: Based on the 4 ways to create solid geometry in Revit Architecture (Solid Extrusion. Linework: You can create model lines and symbolic lines in a family. and create a complex window family with a complex opening.

Various parameters drive the behavior of the family. ■ Visibility settings: If specific visibility settings are required for selected geometry or linework. A Family parameter does only appear in the family itself. By instance: Each single instance of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. you can use a parameter with the Parameter Data Type Yes / No. Section. By family type: Each type of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. you should define different widths for each of the casements. and should account for instances when either of the casements is toggled off. Assigning material: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Directly: The solid geometry in the family has material explicitly assigned. Level of detail: Revit Architecture allows you specify the visibility of each solid form and line geometry for the Detail Levels Coarse. where a Shared parameter can appear in schedule and tags and can be exported to ODBC. Sketching the requirements The window family should be modelled with different detail levels in Plan. By category: The solid material gets its material from the selected category or subcategory in a project. Medium and Fine. 546 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .■ Scheduling/exporting parameters: Revit Architecture differs between different parameter types. and Elevation views. Detail Level View Plan Coarse Medium Fine Section Elevation Additionally.

One test scenario consists in switching between the wall types with different thicknesses to check whether the constraints work correctly. You should test your family often as you incrementally build geometry in the next steps. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.rft. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.The window contains the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A: Insertion depth B: Frame depth C: Frame width D: Sash width E: Center post width F: Wall offset G: Left width H: Right width I: Width J: Wall offset top K: Top frame height L: Bottom frame height M: Height Outer sill: ■ ■ ■ Fixed front height: 30mm Fixed back height: 50mm Fixed offset: 30mm ■ Glass fixed width: 20mm Selecting a Family Template In this exercise. and click Open. Selecting a Family Template | 547 . The family template uses a wall as host. select Metric Window. click Training Files. create a second wall type with a different wall thickness so that you can test the family. The family editor is opened with a new window family. you open a template that you use as the basis for the complex window family. 1 Close all open projects or families. navigate to Metric ➤ Templates.

11 Switch back to the previous wall settings: ■ ■ Select the wall. refer to the command line to verify what is selected. 7 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Left reference plane. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening The window contains a more complex wall opening than a standard rectangular opening. click Duplicate. and on the Options Bar. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Insertion Edge. 3 Select the horizontal reference plane. and on the Options Bar. and click . 7 In the Name dialog. enter 400. 548 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Verify that Defines Origin is selected. In the Type Selector. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. accept the default name. select Wall Closure. for Is Reference. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Right reference plane. click Edit/New. Under Other. . This means that the exterior wall layers that have wraps assigned will end at this reference plane. Click OK. . under Other. click Edit. for Structure ➤ Thickness. ■ ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name.4 Select the wall. select Defines Origin. Prepare the centered reference planes 1 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. select Weak Reference. 10 Click OK 3 times. and click OK. click . click Ref Plane. 9 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and click OK. click 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Create reference planes for the opening 6 On the Design Bar. 9 Click Modify. for Construction ➤ Structure. in the Edit toolbar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Construction. so you model the new opening first. This requires that the standard rectangular opening be deleted and replaced with voids cut out from the default wall. click 2 In the Element Properties dialog. select Basic Wall : Wall 1. 5 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. for Name.

The horizontal reference plane defines the inner edge and the new vertical reference planes define the left and right edges of the wall offset for the opening. drag the Interior horizontal reference plane to the left side. because each inserted value should have a different insertion depth. Click OK. select Add Parameter. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Click Modify. Next. 12 Using the same method. 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. click Dimension. 22 Dimension the Left and Wall Offset Left vertical reference planes. and select Instance. 16 Dimension the Exterior and Insertion Edge horizontal reference planes. enter Insertion Depth. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. refer to the status bar to verify what is selected. for Name. For Group parameter under. Dimension horizontal reference planes 15 On the Design Bar.10 Select the first reference plane you created. This parameter is defined as an instance parameter. use the blue circle grip to drag the left edge of the reference plane to line up with the left side of the Insertion Edge reference plane. for Identity Data ➤ Name. 18 Select the Exterior reference plane. enter Wall Offset Left. 13 Select the Exterior horizontal reference plane on the top wall edge. and click OK. By extending the reference pane. for the temporary dimension. for Label. 23 Click Modify. 14 Using the same method. Dimension vertical reference planes 21 On the Design Bar. and click . dimension the vertical reference planes. enter 75. on the Options Bar. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening | 549 . name the other new reference plane Wall Offset Right. you can more easily select it because it doesn’t overlap with other elements in the drawing. 19 Select the dimension. select Constraints. click Dimension.

enter Wall Offset Top.24 Select the Wall Offset Left reference plane. you apply the same method to reference planes in an elevation view. For Group parameter under. for Identity Data ➤ Name. for Name. double-click Exterior. 33 Select the new reference plane. for Label. on the Options Bar. select Add Parameter. click Dimension. on the Options Bar. dimension the Right and Wall Offset Right reference planes. 30 On the Design Bar. enter 100. 28 Select the dimension. for the temporary dimension. and click . 27 Using the same method. The reference planes and parameters for the plan view are defined. select Construction. Click OK. for Label. 25 Select the dimension. 550 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for Label. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. under Elevations. 35 On the Design Bar. The skeleton for the opening is complete. 36 Dimension the Head and Wall Offset Top reference planes. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. for the temporary dimension. select Wall Offset. for Name. Next. click Ref Plane. enter Wall Offset. For Group parameter under. on the Options Bar. 39 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Dimension reference planes in elevation 29 In the Project Browser. enter Wall Offset Top. and press ENTER. 31 Create a horizontal reference plane below the Head reference plane. enter 100. select Add Parameter. select Construction. 38 Select the dimension. 32 Click Modify. and click OK. 37 Select the Wall Offset Top reference plane.

and Wall Offset Right reference planes.rfa. click (Align). 6 On the Tools toolbar. Wall Offset Left. under Floor Plans. and lock the alignment. 4 On the Design Bar.40 Save the file as Casement Window. select Reference Plane : Sill. under Specify a new Work Plane. 8 Using the same method. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 551 . 7 Select the Exterior reference plane. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. select the top edge of the sketch. 5 On the Options Bar. double-click Ref. 1 In the Project Browser. and sketch the extrusion as shown. 2 On the Tools toolbar. Level. and click OK. click . 3 In the Work Plane dialog. for Name. NOTE Zoom in as necessary so that the rectangle does not snap to reference planes. lock the other sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. click (Plane). Modelling a Complex Wall Opening You model the opening with voids that are cut from the wall geometry.

9 On the Design Bar. 15 Using the same method. and Left reference planes. click (Align). NOTE Create the void extrusion directly below the one you just created. 14 Align the bottom edge of the smaller void to the Sill reference plane. and press DELETE. and lock the alignment. Also. you need to delete the standard rectangular opening cut. 12 On the Tools toolbar. 552 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 In the Project Browser. click (3D). In order to use the voids as a new opening. 13 Align the top edge of the smaller void to the Wall Offset Top reference plane. 10 Using the same method. Right. under Elevations. 16 On the Views toolbar. Interior. Lock the sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. the voids need to be cut from the wall geometry. double-click Exterior. click Finish Sketch. align and constrain the top and bottom edges of the other void to the Head and Sill reference planes. create and constrain a void extrusion for the inner part of the opening as shown. and lock the alignment. 17 Select the left vertical edge of the default opening (Opening Cut).

cut the second void from the wall. Next. The first void is cut from the wall. you control correct behavior of the new wall opening by changing the wall offset parameters. 18 On the Tools toolbar. click (Cut Geometry). 20 Using the same method. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 553 .The opening in the wall is deleted. 19 Select the void. and then select the wall geometry.

and click . enter 100mm. 7 Select the Frame Left reference plane. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Wall Offset Right reference plane. 554 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Change wall offset parameters 21 On the Design Bar. select Not a Reference. click Family Types. 2 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Wall Offset Left reference plane. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 6 Dimension the Left and Frame Left vertical reference planes. double-click Ref. Click OK. enter Frame Left. Level. For Wall Offset. enter 50mm. 9 Select the reference plane. click Dimension. Creating Window Frame Geometry The reference planes and parameters for the window frame are defined in the plan and exterior elevation views. enter 50mm. Note that the opening has changed correctly. for the temporary dimension. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 3 Select the reference plane. 22 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Construction ➤ Wall Offset Top. 5 On the Design Bar. You can also test the opening by flexing the wall types and thicknesses.

Click OK. enter Frame Right. 13 Select the Frame Right reference plane. name it Frame Interior. enter 100mm. select Not a Reference. 12 Dimension the Right and Frame Right vertical reference planes. on the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. for Label. 14 Select the right dimension. and create a Frame Depth type parameter dimension as shown. 17 Using the same method. click Dimension. for Name. for Label. enter Frame Width.10 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. on the Options Bar. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 555 . For Group parameter under. Click OK. select Add Parameter. select Frame Width. For Other ➤ Is Reference. select Construction. 16 Select the left dimension. for the temporary dimension. create a horizontal reference plane below the Insertion Edge reference plane.

18 Create 2 more vertical reference planes to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 556 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The exact vertical position of the reference planes is not important. and create a Center Post Width type parameter dimension. 19 Using the same method used previously. name the reference planes Center Post Left and Center Post Right. dimension the planes at 120mm. NOTE The positioning of the center post will be specified later in the exercise.

31 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. enter Frame Height Bottom. select Construction. for the temporary dimension.Create parameters in elevation 20 In the Project Browser. enter Frame Height Top. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 27 Using the same method. click Dimension. For Other ➤ Is Reference. and click 23 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 24 On the Design Bar. select Not a Reference. on the Options Bar. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 21 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Sill reference plane. for Label. For Group parameter under. 25 Dimension the Sill and Frame Bottom horizontal reference planes. Click OK. Click OK. 26 Select the Frame Bottom reference plane. select Add Parameter. For Group parameter under. under Elevations. 28 Select the lower dimension. select Add Parameter. and dimension the Head and Frame Top reference planes at 150mm. double-click Exterior. create a horizontal reference plane below the Wall Offset Top reference plane. on the Options Bar. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 557 . select Construction. 30 Select the other dimension. name it Frame Top. enter 150mm. 22 Select the reference plane. Click OK. for Label. enter Frame Bottom.

Additional values for new parameters will be set continuously after each reasonable step of completeness. instance parameters can be changed on an instance level for each inserted window instance. Under Construction. 36 Under Family Types. Under Construction. For Width. 35 In the Name dialog. enter 100mm. enter 80mm. enter 70mm. For Frame Width. enter 50mm. 37 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 33 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. click Family Types. add 2 window types with different parameters to check whether the parameters work correctly. Before you model the frame geometry.The skeleton of the window frame is complete. For Wall Offset. 38 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Under Other. enter 80mm. for Frame Depth. Create family types 32 On the Design Bar. click New. for Wall Offset Top. For Frame Height Top. enter 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 and Click OK. For Center Post Width. enter 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Family types allow you to set different values for parameters and to save this state as a specific type of the window family. A family type manages type parameters only. for Height. 34 Under Family Types. You create 2 family types for the Casement Window family. for Insertion Depth. For Frame Width. for Wall Offset Top. enter 50mm. For Frame Height Bottom. enter 100mm. enter 100mm. enter 50mm. click New. enter 2000mm. enter 1500mm. Under Dimensions. enter 80mm. For Wall Offset. enter 100mm. for Insertion Depth. 558 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 60mm.

Model frame geometry 41 On the Tools toolbar. for Height. Under Dimensions. Sill. Frame Bottom. 42 In the Work Plane dialog. select Reference Plane : Frame Interior. enter 80mm. and click OK. for Frame Depth. for Name. Frame Left. Frame Top. Head. enter 120mm. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimensions. Center Post Left. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. For Center Post Width. click (Align). Left Creating Window Frame Geometry | 559 . NOTE Create 3 rectangles: One on the left. Right. 44 On the Options Bar. Center Post Right. 46 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. enter 70mm. enter 1500mm. click . 43 On the Design Bar. 39 Click Apply. and click OK.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Frame Height Top. and lock the alignments to create a constraint for all edges as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 45 On the Tools toolbar. Under Other. and a third rectangle outside the intersection of the reference planes. For Frame Height Bottom. For Width. enter 1400mm. Frame Bottom. NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. Rectangle position in view Left Right Outside (larger rectangle) Lock to reference planes Frame Top. click (Plane). Frame Right. one on the right. under Specify a new Work Plane. and sketch the extrusion with 3 rectangles as shown. enter 120mm. 40 Under Name.

click (3D). Level. The window frame is complete. clear Plan/RCP. click Edit. 52 On the Views toolbar. 560 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 49 On the Tools toolbar. For Graphics ➤ Visibility/Graphics Overrides. double-click Ref. 51 Click Modify. clear Coarse. . 55 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 53 Select the extrusion solid geometry. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. 56 Click OK twice. and lock the alignment. 48 In the Project Browser. Under Detail Levels. under Floor Plans. and lock the alignment. Frame material will be assigned later in the tutorial. click 50 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). 57 On the View Control Bar. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane.47 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Frame/Mullion. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

double-click Ref. and click OK. and click 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . Defining the Window Sash Parameters You use known modelling procedures to create the geometry for the window sash.Test the family again 58 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 561 . click Family Types. and click Apply. you model each sash separately. 5 Select the leftmost reference plane you just created. 59 In the Family Types dialog. click Scale ➤ 1:10. under Name. Changing the scale makes it easier to work in detail. because the visibility settings are different for the left and right sashes. enter Sash Left Left. 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 Create 4 vertical reference planes as shown. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. Define parameters in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Level. However. 3 On the Views toolbar. click (Thin Lines) to work with heavier lineweights. under Floor Plans. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 60 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200.

Click OK. Click OK. on the Options Bar. working from left to right: Reference Plane 2 3 4 Properties Name: Sash Left Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Left Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference 8 Dimension the reference planes with adjacent reference planes for the window frame as shown. specify each dimension as 50mm. for Label. double-click Exterior. select Construction. under Elevations. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 18 On the Design Bar. select Sash Width. You can drag dimension text to the left or right side using the Drag Text grip. add parameters to the remaining dimensions. select Add Parameter. 9 Select the left dimension. 562 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 Select the next dimension. click Dimension. 16 Select the reference plane. enter Sash Bottom.■ ■ For Other ➤ Is Reference. on the Options Bar. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 14 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Frame Bottom reference plane. select Not a Reference. specify the properties for the remaining new reference planes. 12 Using the same method. select Not a Reference. For Identity Data ➤ Name. for Label. enter Sash Width. For Group parameter under. Click OK. 7 Using the same method. 15 Click Modify. Define parameters in elevation view 13 In the Project Browser. and click 17 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ .

Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 563 . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimension. for Label. and sketch 2 rectangles to form the right sash extrusion as shown. 32 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. and lock the alignment to create a constraint for all edges as shown. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. enter 50mm. click . 20 Select the Sash Bottom reference plane. 24 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 22 Select the Sash Top reference plane. create a horizontal reference plane below the Frame Top reference plane: ■ ■ ■ Name it Sash Top. Dimension the Frame Top and Sash Top reference planes. The skeleton of the window sash is complete. select Sash Width. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. enter 70mm. on the Options Bar. 23 While pressing CTRL. select both dimensions. for Sash Width. 28 For Name. for the temporary dimension. enter 50mm. 31 On the Tools toolbar. 30 On the Options Bar.19 Dimension the Frame Bottom and Sash Bottom reference planes. 27 Click Apply. 26 Under Construction. click Family Types. for the temporary dimension. Create solid extrusions 29 On the Design Bar. click (Align). 25 For Name. Specify it as Not a Reference. Before you model the sash geometry. extend the 2 window types with different values for the new parameter to check whether the parameter work correctly. and click OK. 21 Using the same method.

click Edit. 34 In the Project Browser. and lock the alignment. enter 1500. 43 On the Views toolbar. Level. Center Post Right. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. for Cut plane ➤ Offset. Sash Right Left. NOTE Modifying the cut plane offset value allows you to see the sash extrusion in the view. click Finish Sketch. 42 Switch back to the Ref. 564 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Sash Top. double-click Ref. 41 Using the same method.NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. and lock the alignment. 37 In the View Range dialog. click (3D). Sash Right Right. Rectangle position in view Outside Inside Lock to reference planes Frame Top. Level floor plan view to align the edges as you did for the right sash. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. under Floor Plans. Frame Right. 40 Click Modify. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. for Extents ➤ View Range. 38 On the Tools toolbar. switch to the Exterior Elevation view and create the solid extrusion for the left sash. 33 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 35 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Frame Bottom. Sash Bottom. click 39 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align).

6 Using the same method. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 3 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click Add parameter. select Construction. 1 Select the right solid geometry of the window sash. for Graphics ➤ Visible. For Group Parameter under. 47 Click OK twice. 46 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. select the 2 extrusions. select Frame/Mullion. click Edit.44 While pressing CTRL. clear Coarse. click the rectangular button on the right side. create a visibility parameter for the left sash named Sash Left. and click 45 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ . 7 On the Design Bar. enter Sash Right. Defining Visibility Parameters You add visibility parameters so that you can display the left and right sashes separately. Under Detail Levels. clear Plan/RCP. 5 Click OK 3 times. click Family Types. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. and click . Defining Visibility Parameters | 565 . For Graphics ➤ Visibility. note the parameters you have just created with checkboxes in the Value column.

7 Click EQ to center the reference plane for the glass axis between the reference planes for the window frame. 9 Create 3 more reference planes as shown. under Elevations. double-click Exterior. and name them Glass Axis Right. For Identity Data ➤ Name. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 2 Create a horizontal reference plane between the Insertion Edge and Frame Interior reference planes. double-click Ref. NOTE Any 3D geometry assigned to a Yes/No parameter is still visible in the family editor. the geometry is only greyed out if the visibility parameter is not assigned. under Floor Plans. select Not a Reference. 6 Using one dimension string. Glass Axis. Glass Axis Left. enter Glass Axis. 9 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. 8 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. The glass is located in the center of the frame / sash with a fixed thickness of 20mm. 566 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . not aligned to reference planes. click Dimension. and Glass Axis Horizontal. clear Sash Left.Test the family 8 For Name. 10 Under Construction. 3 Select the reference plane. This is because the glass width and height will be extended to the window frame if the sash is switched off. Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry The glass geometry will be dimensioned directly in the sketch. Level. dimension the Insertion Edge. and click Apply. For Other ➤ Is Reference. and Frame Interior reference planes. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. Click OK. and click OK.

Creating the Glass Geometry In this exercise. you use extrusions to create the glass for the complex window family. You create parameters that define the dimensions of the glass geometry. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. This centers the glass reference planes between the window sashes. create EQ dimensions with the adjacent sash reference planes. and click OK. and sketch the right glass extrusion as shown. Creating the Glass Geometry | 567 . 4 On the Options Bar. click (Plane). select Reference Plane : Glass Axis. for Name.10 For each of the new reference planes. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Sketch the right glass extrusion 1 On the Tools toolbar. 2 In the Work Plane dialog. click .

dimension the left edge of the sketch. for Label. on the Options Bar. 6 Using one dimension string. select Add Parameter. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 568 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. 11 Select the dimension line and. dimension the top and the bottom of the sketch. the Glass Axis Right reference plane. For Group Parameter under. and the right edge of the sketch. 13 Using the same method. dimension the top and bottom edge of the sketch. 8 Using the same method. click Dimension. enter Glass Length Right.Dimension the sketch 5 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 Dimension the left edge and right edge of the sketch. and create a Glass Height Right parameter. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Other. 7 Click EQ. Click OK.

clear Plan/RCP. enter 10. click Finish Sketch. Under Detail Levels. Assign properties 15 Select the glass geometry.0. 18 Click OK twice. and click 16 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Extrusion Start. clear Coarse. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. For Constraints ➤ Extrusion End. enter -10. create the glass geometry for the left sash with the new parameters Glass Height Left and Glass Length Left. 17 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. click Edit. select Glass. 20 Assign the same Element properties to the left extrusion that you assigned to the right. 21 On the Views toolbar.14 On the Design Bar. Create the left glass extrusion 19 Using the same method. Creating the Glass Geometry | 569 .0. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. click (3D).

Creating Formulas to Define Width Formulas are one of the many powerful aspects of Revit Architecture Families . as it will minimize performance hits. Formulas are typed directly into the Family Types dialog box. you should do it. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading With Edges. Expressions for formulas Mathematical Function Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Logarithm Square Root Sine Cosine Tangent Arcsine Arccosine Arctangent e raised to an x power Absolute Value Expression + * / x^y. set the height to 2000) as well as mathematical expressions. where all of the parameters for a family are listed. if you can build your family without using formulas. x raised to the power of y log sqrt(Value) sin cos tan asin acos atan exp abs 570 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .used to control families in many ways. The formulas in the following chapters of this tutorial should give you mainly an impression of how complex formulas can be set. However. Formulas can use logic such as IF statements (IF the width is 1000. They can also be used to control Yes/No parameters.22 On the View Control Bar.

8 . B = 3 ) . 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 2'-6". for the temporary dimension. on the Options Bar. click Add. click Family Types. 8 . 3'-0" ) Simple IF . <result-if-false>) IF ( Length < 35' .OR IF ( OR ( A = 1 . NOTE Do not dimension the right sash using the same method. The width of the right sash will be determined using formulas. for Label. Level. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. under Floor Plans. Click OK. y = 2). 3' . under Parameters.(2*30) Simple IF IF ( <condition>. 9 In the Family Types dialog. This would overconstrain the family. IF ( Length < 45' . 3 ) Simple IF . 5' . 6 Select the dimension. 5 Select the Center Post Left reference plane. enter Width Sash Left. 3 ) Multiple IF IF ( Length< 35' . double-click Ref. 8 . 4 Click Modify. For Type of Parameter. 8 On the Design Bar.11 Samples for formulas Standard Width . Creating Formulas to Define Width | 571 .AND IF ( AND (x = 1 . 8' ) ) ) IF . select Add Parameter.6. click Dimension. 3 ) Yes/No Controlling the state of a Yes/No parameters A with a next Yes/No parameter B: Not (B) Position the center post 1 In the Project Browser. <result-if-true>. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Length. IF ( Length < 55' . select Dimensions. For Group parameter under. enter 1000."A" is less than or equal to "B": IF ( NOT ( A > B ) . enter Width Sash Right. 2' 6" . 3 Dimension the Frame Left and Center Post Left reference planes.

Frame Height Top . The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. and Center Post Width. (Width Sash Left . Width Sash Right).Frame Height Top . 16 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. select Dimensions. enter formulas: ■ Under Other.2 * Sash Width). Click OK.Center Post Width 12 Press ENTER. enter if(Sash Left. The value is greyed out. the new value is 560. You can test the formulas by switching between the different window types in the Family Types dialog. (Height .2 * Sash Width). In the Formula row for Glass Height Left. (Width Sash Right .(Frame Width * 2) .Frame Height Top . ■ ■ ■ 20 Click OK.2 * Sash Width). 572 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 400. and press ENTER. enter if(Sash Right.Frame Height Bottom . enter the formula to get the calculated width: (Width . the new value is 880. ■ Click Apply.■ ■ For Group Parameter under. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200.Frame Height Top Frame Height Bottom .Frame Height Bottom). Width Sash Left. ■ Click Apply. Height . In the Formula row for Glass Length Left.Frame Height Bottom). 14 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. Width Sash Left). 19 In the Family Types dialog.2 * Sash Width). select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. 17 For Name. (Height . for Dimensions ➤ Width Sash Right ➤ Formula. Define glass width and length 18 On the Design Bar. Test the family 13 Under Name. Height . The value for Width Sash Right is now calculated dependent on the values for Width. enter if(Sash Right. and click OK. enter 1200. and press ENTER. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. 11 In the Family Types dialog. in the Formula row for Glass Length Right.Width Sash Left) . select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Frame Width. The glass dimensions are now dependent on the visibility settings for the window sashes. click Family Types. enter if(Sash Left. In the Formula row for Glass Height Right. and cannot be changed in the Family Types dialog. 15 For Name.

select Reference Plane : Insertion Edge. click (Plane). for Name. Creating Elevation Lines | 573 . select Elevation Swing [projection]. 8 In the Type Selector. 10 Create single symbolic lines as shown. double-click Exterior. 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 7 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. and lock all alignment constraints. clear Chain. 3 Click OK. under Elevations. 5 On the Tools toolbar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 4 In the Project Browser. under Category. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. note the Elevation Swing subcategory. 9 On the Options Bar. expand Windows. and click OK. They should be placed on a selected subcategory.Creating Elevation Lines The best method to create the elevation lines for the sashes is to create them in the exterior elevation view. click Symbolic Lines.

5 In the Materials dialog. If the subcategory already exists in the project. under Category. sash. Creating Material Parameters Material parameters for selected solid geometry make the family more flexible in terms of materials assignments for different window types. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. 4 In the New Material dialog. expand accurender ➤ Solid Colors. enter Window Frame. select Sash Right. click . and click Duplicate. for Visible. 15 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. under Detail Levels. Assign a default material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 12 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. the object styles settings of the project define the default material. The default material is assigned to the Frame/Mullion category. associate the symbolic lines on the right side with the Sash Left family parameter.11 In the drawing area. select Default. 3 In the Materials dialog. When the family is added to a project and the subcategory does not exist in the project. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Material Library dialog. clear Coarse. 16 Click OK twice. while pressing CTRL. 7 Select Cool. Material parameters override the material assignment of the subcategories in the Object Styles dialog. for Name. for Windows ➤ Frame/Mullion. unless the default value is < By Category >. under Graphics. 13 While pressing CTRL. and glass. and click . and click OK. 17 Using the same method. select the rectangular button on the right side. select all symbolic lines. Assigning Default Materials You can assign a default material for each subcategory. select the 2 symbolic lines on the left side. under AccuRender. 18 Save the file. for Name. this subcategory is added to the project and has the material assignment from the family. When you assign default materials in a family. and click OK. and select Whites.Matte. 574 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Next. and click OK three times. you create material parameters for the frame. click in the Material column. click Visibility. check whether the solid geometry has the correct subcategory assigned. and click the button on the right side of the column. and on the Options Bar.

double-click Ref. You can override it on a type level. for Materials and Finishes ➤ Material. 7 Using the same method.rfa. Creating Nested Families | 575 . which nests them. a Width type parameter. The concrete sill family consists of a solid extrusion. When the family is loaded into a project. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Concrete Sill. Creating Sill Families There are 2 window sill families available in the training folders. click Training Files. Using family type parameters in the main family. parameters of nested families can be associated with parameters of the main family. and a fixed dimension for the sill overhang. . you learn how to import window sill families into the window family and associate parameters of the nested families to the main family. select Materials and Finishes. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (3D). Creating Nested Families Families can be imported into families. For Group parameter under. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 9 Click OK. Open the families and explore the design of them. Note the new Material parameters under Material and Finishes. 6 Click OK three times. 2 Select the solid geometry of the window frame. and associate the sash and glass solid geometry with the respective parameter. The Back and Center (Left/Right) reference planes define the origin of the family. 10 Save the file. 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. click Family Types. you can switch between imported families of the same category. Level. The default value is By Category. a Depth instance parameter. click the rectangular button on the right side. create 2 material parameters named Sash and Glass.1 On the Views toolbar. click Add parameter. 4 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. If this parameter is defined as shared. Concrete sill family 1 Close all open projects or families. In this lesson. and click Open. You can then model parts of the family separately from the main family model. the solid geometry has the material that is assigned to its subcategory in the Object Styles dialog. enter Frame. and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

has a fixed material Window Sill Concrete assigned. double-click View 1. 12 Select the solid geometry. and is visible only in detail level Fine. 576 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The elevation view shows reference planes with fixed dimensions. Metal sill family 9 Close all open projects or families. double-click Left. 7 Select the solid geometry. The Bottom reference plane defines the origin of the family. and click Open. 10 Click File menu ➤ Open. 11 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click .5 In the Project Browser. The sketch lines of the extrusion are locked to all exterior reference planes. click Training Files.rfa. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Metal Sill. The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. under 3D views. 6 In the Project Browser. and click . under Elevations. 8 Click OK.

click Load into Projects. open m_Concrete Sill. click Load into Projects. Reference Planes.rfa. and Origins are as in the concrete sill family. and verify thatm_Concrete Sill. has a fixed material Window Sill Metal assigned. 4 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click OK. and then load families into the casement window family you have created. and is visible only in detail level Fine. 10 Click OK. You open the main family first. The concrete sill family is now loaded into the Window family. 3 Using the same method. 9 In the Load into Projects dialog.The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. and verify that m_Metal Sill.rfa -3D View: View1. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family Families opened in the family editor can be loaded directly into other families. 13 Click OK. select Casement Window.rfa. 2 In the Open dialog. Load the concrete sill 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa is cleared.rfa. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.rfa is cleared. The category of a family can be changed under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 8 On the Design Bar. The metal sill family is now loaded into the Window family. Both sill families were created with the Generic Model family template and changed to a window family. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog.rfa. and click Open. navigate to Casement Window. Parameters. Load the metal sill 7 Click Window menu ➤ Metal Sill. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family | 577 . select Casement Window.

578 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Family Types. Creating a Length Parameter The sill length needs to be equivalent to the exterior width of the window family. you create a parameter that determines the true sill length in the window family. As both sill families have been defined as Window families.12 Close and save m_Metal Sill. select Length.rfa. select Construction.rfa and m_Concrete Sill. Create the parameter 1 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. For Group parameter under. for Construction ➤ Sill Length. they appear in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Windows. Click OK. double-click Concrete Sill. 13 Maximize Casement Window. in the Formula column.rfa. Associate the parameter to nested families 6 In the Project Browser. enter Width .2* Wall Offset. enter Sill Length. 2 In the Family Types dialog. under Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. under Parameters. click Add. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. For Type of Parameter. 5 Click OK.

11 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane of the window family. and click to place it. The sill family needs to be positioned and aligned in plan and elevation views.7 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. Align the sill 10 On the Tools toolbar. Level. associate the Length parameter of the Metal Sill family. 4 Drag Concrete Sill into the drawing area. select the hidden Center (Left/Right) reference plan of the Sill family. 10 Using the same method. select Sill Length. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click the rectangular button on the right side. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 9 Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. The Width instance parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the Insertion Depth parameter of the window family. expand Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. click (Align). click the rectangular button on the right side. aligning it to reference planes in both plan and elevation views. for Dimensions ➤ Length. Placing the Sill Family In this exercise. The Length type parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the calculated value of the Sill Length parameter of the window family. for Dimensions ➤ Width. Associate an instance parameter 6 Select the solid geometry of the concrete sill. select Insertion Depth. you place the concrete sill in the project. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Modify. Place the family 1 In the Project Browser. Placing the Sill Family | 579 . double-click Ref. and lock the alignment. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click . 9 Click OK twice.

Creating a Shared Parameter In order to switch the sill from concrete to metal on an instance level. 17 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. under Elevations. align the lower horizontal edge of the sill to the Insertion Edge reference plane of the Window family. The sill is placed in the desired position. double-click Left. under 3D Views. click (Align). 13 In the Project Browser. click and spin the wall.12 Using the same method. 15 On the Tools toolbar. align the bottom edge of the sill family. and lock the alignment. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. TIP If the sill does not display. and lock the alignment. 16 Select the Sill reference plane of the window family. 580 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 18 On the View Control Bar. 14 On the View Control Bar. you add a Sill Type parameter. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

for Constraints ➤ Sill Type (default). click New. navigate to Training. the parameter appears on the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog in the available fields list. click Family Types. for Group parameter under. If the family is then loaded into a project. click Shared parameter. click Add. under Groups. select Sill Type. select Constraints.To display the custom parameter in a schedule. 4 Under File name. you must define the parameter as a shared parameter. under Parameters. 3 Click Apply. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select Metal Sill. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Name. enter Training Shared Parameter. 14 In the Shared Parameters dialog. under Parameter Type. click Family Types. enter Windows. 12 In the Family Types dialog. for Label. under Parameters. select <Family Type>. click OK. 9 In the Select Category dialog. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and select Instance. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. and click OK. Testing Nested Families | 581 . Under Type of Parameter. Create the shared parameter 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. Associate the parameter to geometry 17 In the drawing area. 13 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Testing Nested Families You can test the correct behavior of the nested families directly in the window family. 2 In the Family Types dialog. and click Save. The metal sill replaces the concrete sill. Add the parameter to a family 11 On the Design Bar. click Create. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Name. 16 Click OK twice. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and click Select. click New. 18 On the Options Bar. select Windows. Note that the last created Shared Parameter file has been automatically opened. 10 Click OK 3 times. enter Sill Type. 3 In the Save As dialog. select the Concrete Sill family.

click (3D). insert a Casement Window : 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 in the wall. 2 Click Window menu ➤ Casement Window. 7 Using the same method. Testing the Family in a Project Environment Finally. click the Wall tool. and create a horizontal wall. 9 In the View Control Bar. select Casement Window : 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200 and place the window in the wall. TIP If the sill does not display. click . check all views at all levels of detail. 3 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rfa -3D View: View 1. This creates a new project with the default template. use best practice to test the window in multiple wall thicknesses in the project environment. 8 On the Views toolbar. 6 In the Type Selector.4 Click OK. click the Window tool. 582 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 On the Design Bar. click and spin the wall. Test windows and sills 1 On the Standard toolbar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. Create a window schedule 12 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and drawers as extrusions. add the fields Mark. Height. Under Name. select Windows. drawer base. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. and click . and Sill Type to the Scheduled fields list. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.10 Select the smaller window. and click OK. You begin by creating the desktop. Note that the window sill has changed. 13 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Click OK. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. rolltop. Width. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type. select Metal Sill. Sill Type is now displayed in the schedule table. enter Window Schedule with Sills. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating a Furniture Family | 583 . and click OK.

their exact location is not critical. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. 2 On the File menu. they represent the furniture centerline axes. 5 On the View menu. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. click Ref Plane. 4 Maximize the view. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. 584 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . NOTE When you draw the reference planes.rft. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. Level. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar.Finally. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click New ➤ Family. Floor Plan: Ref. click Training Files. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.

as shown. click Dimension. Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar. 10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane.8 Draw two vertical reference planes. and ending at the right reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 585 . one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown.

13 Select the left reference plane. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. 586 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown.Click the EQ symbol to make the segments equal.

as shown. and ending at the lower reference plane.15 On the Design Bar. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. click Dimension. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 587 . add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. as shown.

click Modify.18 On the Design Bar. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. TIP To do this. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. 588 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. Afterwards. horizontal reference plane. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the upper.

25 In the Parameter Properties dialog.. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 589 . 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. select <Add parameter. For Group parameter under. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog.> for Label. Select Type. select Family parameter. 24 On the Options Bar..Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. 27 On the Options Bar.. select Dimensions. Under Parameter Data. select Family parameter. Click OK. enter Length for Name. specify the following: ■ Under Parameter type.. select <Add parameter.> for Label.

For Group parameter under. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. select Dimensions. click Family Types. you can still see the model. enter 3000 mm for Length. 30 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. it will also adapt to the same changes. Click Apply. Click OK. so when you open the Family Types dialog. 590 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Therefore. enter Depth for Name. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. Select Type. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. Enter 1500 mm for Depth.■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 31 In the Family Types dialog.

the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. click Lines. Your lines may have a lighter weight. 5 On the Design Bar. and enter 100 mm for Depth. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. Click OK. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. select Level: Ref. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 591. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. NOTE In the image below. click . click Symbolic Lines. click Set Work Plane. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Apply. and click to select all four symbolic lines. 7 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. Level for Name. 2 On the Options Bar. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. under Specify a new Work Plane. enter 2000 mm for Length. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 591 .32 In the Family Types dialog. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option.

under Elevations. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. 592 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Finish Sketch. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. and select the top edge. Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and select the bottom edge.10 On the Design Bar. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. click Modify. double-click Front. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar.

click Modify. For Group parameter under. select Dimensions. click Modify. as shown. Click OK. For Group parameter under. Select Type. 27 On the Design Bar. select <Add parameter.> for Label. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. select Dimensions.. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.. enter Height for Name. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select <Add parameter. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension.> for Label. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge.. Under Parameter Data. enter Thickness for Name. select Family parameter. 22 On the Options Bar.18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. Under Parameter Data. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 593 . 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. 25 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter.. Select Type. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Click OK.

594 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Floor Plans. Enter 750 mm for Height. click . 3 On the Options Bar. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. Level. Click OK. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. enter 2000 mm for Length. and click Apply. enter 4000 mm for Length. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 594. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters.Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. Click Apply. and enter 100 mm for Offset. double-click Ref. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. 31 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 2 On the Design Bar. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. 29 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. so when you open the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. click Ref Plane. you can still see the model. 30 In the Family Types dialog. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 1200 mm for Height.

Lock the dimension as shown. click Dimension. Click the lock icon as shown. 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it.5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 595 . 6 On the Design Bar. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added.

596 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines.Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. under Specify a new Work Plane. two lock icons display. as shown. Level for Name. click . and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. 10 On the Design Bar. select Level: Ref. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. After you complete the rectangle. 12 On the Design Bar.

click Dimension. click Modify. 19 Select the four sketched lines. You can also highlight the entire line chain. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 597 . TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. click the Mirror tool.16 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 20 On the Tools toolbar. . Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. using the TAB key. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis.

A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. click . 23 For the align-to reference. 598 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. as shown below at the cursor. 22 On the Tools toolbar. 24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown.

25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.A lock icon displays. 26 On the Design Bar. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. click Dimension. ■ Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 599 . 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.

as shown.28 Add two final dimensions. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. select Dimensions. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. select Family parameter. 600 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Parameter Data. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. Select Type.. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog.. Click OK. For Group parameter under. select <Add parameter.> for Label.

Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 33 On the Options Bar. click . 34 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. click Finish Sketch. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 601 . double-click Front. select Drawer Base Width for Label. 35 On the Design Bar. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. 37 On the Tools toolbar.32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion.

notice that annotations display in this view. 41 On the View toolbar. However. you can still see the model. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Modify. and click OK. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. After the alignment. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. 602 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . a lock icon displays. click it to lock the alignment. click Visibility/Graphics.39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. 45 On the View Control Bar. 40 On the Design Bar. click the Scale control and select 1:20. 42 On the View menu.

Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 603. Enter 1200 mm for Height. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 750 mm for Height. double-click Right.47 On the Design Bar. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 603 . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. Click OK. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click Apply. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 48 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. and click Apply. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. Click Apply. under Elevations. enter 2000 mm for Length. 49 In the Family Types dialog. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Apply. Enter 100 mm for Thickness.

604 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. then the lower horizontal sketch line. click . click Lines. 8 On the Tools toolbar. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. 9 Select the desk top. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. under Specify a new Work Plane.2 On the Design Bar. click . click Set Work Plane. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click to specify the upper left corner. 3 On the Design Bar. as shown.

and lock it. and lock it. then select the right parallel sketch line. 11 On the Design Bar. and lock the alignment. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 605 . 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. click Dimension.10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion.

13 On the Design Bar. . click the Fillet arc tool. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. click Lines. 16 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. the upper sketch line. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. 606 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. click Finish Sketch.

20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. and click the lock icon. 18 On the Tools toolbar. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. click . select the right edge of the rolltop. double-click Front.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 607 . select the left edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon. under Elevations. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser.

and click Apply. The desk should adapt to all the changes. 23 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. If not. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. click Family Types. and click Apply. click . Enter 200 mm for Thickness. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned.21 On the View toolbar. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Height. you can still see the model. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 24 In the Family Types dialog. 608 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 4000 mm for Length. You can also use dimension constraints. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog.

25 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. Click OK. “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 609. Click Apply. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Pick a Plane. click Set Work Plane. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter 2000 mm for Length. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 609 . 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Enter 750 mm for Height. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Specify a new Work Plane.

zoom the view until you do. 12 On the Options Bar. click . 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. 6 On the Design Bar. Lock each dimension as you add it. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 11 On the Tools toolbar. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. click Lines. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 610 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. double-click Front. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. 7 On the Options Bar.5 In the Project Browser. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. select Multiple Alignment. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. 9 On the Design Bar. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. 14 On the Tools toolbar. There should be four dimensions as shown. under Elevations. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first. click drawer set on the left. . If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. click .

under AccuRender. Cherry. for Material. click OK. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. 22 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Materials dialog. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. click . click for Texture. Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. click the Model Graphics Style control. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. click OK. and click OK. click 24 In the Materials dialog. Polished. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained.Wood. click Extrusion Properties. Dark. click . 17 On the Design Bar.15 On the Tools toolbar. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 611 . under Constraints. 19 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Material Library dialog. 20 On the View toolbar. 29 In the Materials dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Desk . and select Shading with Edges. 28 Click OK. click Modify. 31 On the View Control Bar. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Duplicate. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 25 In the New Material dialog.

36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. Enter 750 mm for Height. and click Apply. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. If not. enter 4000 mm for Length. 33 On the Design Bar. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 612. Click OK.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. 35 In the Family Types dialog. The desk should adapt to all the changes. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. 34 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. Click Apply. you can still see the model. You can also use dimension constraints. enter 2000 mm for Length. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. 612 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Enter 200 mm for Thickness.

5 Under Family Types. and click Open.rfa file. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. click Family Types. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 18 In the Open dialog. click Load. 19 In the Type Selector. 4 In the Family Types dialog. click . enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. 8 Under Family Types. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. to start a new project based on your default template. click Component. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. 6 In the Name dialog. 15 On the View Control Bar. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. 17 On the Options Bar. select it. 3 In the Name dialog.rfa. and click Apply. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. click New. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. under Family Types. 9 In the Name dialog.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. click 14 On the View toolbar. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. click Save. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. 2 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. Defining New Furniture Types | 613 . and click OK. click New. 11 On the File menu. Training Furniture. click New. and click OK. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. 7 In the Family Types dialog. click Apply. and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog.

You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. and click to add the third desk.21 In the Type Selector. 614 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 23 In the Type Selector. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks. and add the second desk. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson.

and double-click Ref. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. their exact location is not critical. 2 On the View menu. 7 On the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. expand Views (all). click New ➤ Family. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Level.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Level for Name. However. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. click Finish Sketch. 4 On the Design Bar. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. click Set Work Plane. In the left pane of the New dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Lines.rft. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 9 On the Design Bar. select Ref. Drawing a Baluster | 615 . click Training Files. 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Baluster.

12 On the Options Bar. click the Modelling tab. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. click Modify and select the extrusion. click Stairs. 4 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 2 In the left pane of the New Project dialog. 616 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Finish Sketch. By default. The new custom baluster is now complete.rfa. 6 On the Design Bar. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. double-click Front. 7 On the File menu. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. click . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. 14 Click the lock icon. click New ➤ Project.

19 Click OK. and click Open. 9 On the View toolbar. click Edit for Baluster Placement. under Baluster Family. click Orient ➤ Southwest. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog. 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. select it. click OK. click Shading with Edges. click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the View menu.8 In the Open dialog. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. 13 On the Options Bar. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 617 . click . click . click Edit/New. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters.rfa file. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. click Modify and select the existing railing. 11 On the View menu. 20 In the Type Properties dialog. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar.

click New ➤ Family. click New ➤ Family. and a host sweep. and other sweep-defined objects. you create five different profiles: a sweep.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. However. a railing. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. In the left pane of the New dialog. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. The new sweep profile is now complete. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings. click Lines.Sweep. balusters. soffits. you draw a sweep profile. cornices. a reveal. their exact location is not critical. In the left pane of the New dialog.rft. Level is open. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click Training Files. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.rfa. a stair nosing. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Rail. verify that Ref. click Training Files. In this lesson. under Floor Plans. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs.rft. 618 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create a rail profile.

click New ➤ Family. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 619 . and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. The new rail profile is now complete.Rail. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection.rfa. click Training Files. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. their exact location is not critical. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar. you create a stair nosing profile. However. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. In the left pane of the New dialog.rft. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. click Lines.The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane.

and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Reveal. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser.rfa. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. you create a reveal profile. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. In the left pane of the New dialog. Level is open.rft. verify that Ref. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. their exact location is not critical. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. The new stair nosing profile is now complete. click New ➤ Family. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.Stair Nosing. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. click Lines. 620 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . In addition.Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. However.

which may be any vertical surface. click Training Files. the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). you create a host sweep profile. click Lines. draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. The new reveal profile is now complete.rft.rfa. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 621 . Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. However. In the left pane of the New dialog. their exact location is not critical. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Hosted. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. verify that Ref. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. click New ➤ Family. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface.Reveal. Level is open.

622 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click OK.rte.rfa. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Lines. click Create. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.Host Sweep. However. their exact location is not critical. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. Specify the family category 5 On the Modelling menu. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. click Browse. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. click New ➤ Project. 4 In the New Project dialog. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . The new host sweep profile is now complete. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files.

Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 12 On the Options Bar. expand Elevations. 17 On the View toolbar. select it. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 623 . expand Views (all). click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. 13 In the Open dialog. click Sketch 2D Path. navigate to the location of Profile . NOTE When you sketch the 2D path. 10 On the Design Bar. click Finish Family. select Generic Models for Family Category. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep.Sweep. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Path.6 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Sketch the 2D sweep path 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sweep. enter Sweep for Name. and click OK. and click Open. beside Load Profiles. 9 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. Modify the sweep profile configuration 18 In the Project Browser. the exact location of the path is not critical. click Load Profiles. select Profile . 19 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. and double-click South. click . 16 On the Design Bar.Sweep. 14 In the Type Selector. 7 In the Name dialog. and click OK. click Ref Plane.rfa.

on the Options Bar. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. Draw a wall group 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Under Other. click 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Select the sweep profile and. Under Constraints. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. and open Metric Templates\DefaultMetric. click New ➤ Project.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog. 27 On the View toolbar. click . Create a new project 1 On the File menu. on the Options Bar. select Profile Is Flipped. 2 In the New Project dialog. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. The sweep profile application is now complete. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . click OK. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Finish Family. click Browse. 23 Select the sweep profile again and. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. 26 On the Design Bar. 25 Click OK. click Edit.21 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. click Wall. click Training Files. 624 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

NOTE When you draw the walls. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. click . 6 Draw four walls as shown. 10 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 625 . verify that Horizontal is selected. 9 On the Options Bar. their exact location is not critical. 7 On the View toolbar.

Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. 20 In the Dynamic View dialog. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.Host Sweep. and click OK. you create a room tag which displays room name. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. select it. floor and ceiling finish.Host Sweep : Profile . 17 In the Type Properties dialog. 21 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. click Modify. 626 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Host Sweep for Profile. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 13 On the File menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click Training Files. on the Options Bar. 19 On the View toolbar.rft. Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. . 14 In the Open dialog. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. click Spin [Shift]. 15 Select the wall sweep and. click Edit/New. under Construction. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template. In the left pane of the New dialog. you specify the room tag parameters. The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. click 16 In the Element Properties dialog. select Profile . and click Open. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to the location of Profile .12 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\M_Room Tag. click .rfa. and area with labels added to extract project data. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. click OK.

and click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Type properties dialog. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog. 16 Zoom in on the label. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Name.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click . Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog. select Area. 13 On the Options Bar. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. and click OK. clear Underline. click Label. 3 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 17 In the Type Selector. select Floor Finish. click Edit/New. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. select Label : 2mm. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. enter 2mm for Name. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. and click OK. select Ceiling Finish. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. click Label. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select Underline. 12 In the Type Selector. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 627 . click OK. click Duplicate. and click OK.

Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. notice that there is only one view available. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 628 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and open Metric\Templates\Generic Annotation. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol.rft. click . This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson.rfa. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. The new room tag is now ready for use. 3 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the New dialog. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template.

click Modify. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. 6 On the Options Bar. click . 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point.5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 629 .

3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click New. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. and click OK. select North Line. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. click Modify.The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. 630 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 16 In the Type Selector. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog. 9 On the File menu. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. click Object Styles. 8 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. select A1 metric. click New ➤ Project. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Browse.rte. select 3 for Line Weight. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete.rfa. and click OK. enter North Line for Name. 17 On the Design Bar. Training North Arrow. 2 In the New Project dialog. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. in the North Line row. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. click OK. click Sheet. under Modify Subcategories. and select the upper vertical line. click Modify. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. 12 In the Object Styles dialog. click Training Files. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. 7 Click OK. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click Symbol. select it.rft. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. click New ➤ Titleblock. click Training Files. and click Open. and your project data.10 In the Open dialog. click Modify. text. select Training North Arrow. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. Creating a Titleblock Family | 631 . The titleblock has linework. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the New dialog. You customize the titleblock with a new text style.rfa. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. 12 In the Type Selector. and open Metric\Templates\A0 Metric. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. graphics. 13 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. and labels. 14 On the Design Bar. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson.

and click . 3 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. and click to draw a new vertical line.Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. . click . and enter 140 for Offset. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. click Lines. and enter -25 for Offset. Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. 632 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner.

enter 30 for Offset. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 16 In the Type Selector.12 On the Design Bar. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 633 . 21 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. click Modify. select Title Blocks. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. press CTRL. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 25 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click . and enter 20 for Offset. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. and select the second and third horizontal lines. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. click Lines. 13 In the Type Selector. select Wide Lines. 17 On the Options Bar.

and open Common\Company Logo. text notes. and labels to your titleblock. click Training Files. click Import/Link ➤ Image.The titleblock linework is now complete. you add a company logo. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit/New. click Text. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.jpg. 4 Zoom in on the logo. 6 On the Options Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 634 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. click .

17 On the Design Bar. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. click Modify. enter 10mm Bold for Name. and add an address and phone number as shown. and select the last text note. 18 Select the drag handle. and click OK. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. select Text : 8mm. and select Bold. in the text box. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.9 In the Name dialog. 11 Click OK twice. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 635 . and drag the text note down as shown. enter 10 for Text Size. under Text. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text.

636 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. click Text. click . 24 On the Options Bar. and select the consultant text note. address. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. select Constrain and Multiple. Add consultant name.

Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 637 . 27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position.

638 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. and enter Drawn By:. and enter Sheet Number:. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. select Text : 5mm. click Text. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. 29 On the Options Bar. under Text. click Duplicate. 34 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. click . enter 5mm for Name. enter 5 for Text Size. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Date:. 32 In the Name dialog. and enter Checked By:.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up.

NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 639 . 41 On the Options Bar. select Project Issue Date. and click OK. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click to specify the label location.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. click Label.

51 In the Element Properties dialog. click Center and Middle. select Drawn By. select Checked By and click OK. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the label location. enter 15 for Text Size. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 55 Click OK twice. and click OK.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. and click OK. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. click Label. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 59 On the Options Bar. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. and click to specify the label location. select Sheet Number. enter 15mm Label for Name. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. 50 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. under Text. click . 640 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. select Project Number. and click OK. click Edit/New. and click to specify the label location. select Label : 15mm Label. 53 In the Name dialog.

66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Project Name. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. click Label. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. select Client Name. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. and click OK. and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 641 . and click to specify the label location. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.

642 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field.rfa file. 9 Click OK. click OK. click Left and Middle. select 4mm Label.rfa. 2 In the New Project dialog. enter 4 for Text Size. click Modify. click Browse.70 On the Options Bar. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Duplicate. 71 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 8 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click Open. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 73 In the Name dialog. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. click Training Files. and click to specify the label location. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 75 Click OK twice. under Text. 77 On the Options Bar. click . click Sheet. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. and click OK. and labels are now complete. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. select File Path. click Edit/New. The titleblock graphics. 7 In the Open dialog. enter 4mm Label. click Load. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. select it. 80 On the Design Bar. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock.rte. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. text. click New ➤ Project.

click Modify and select the titleblock. under Other. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. click . Enter Office Building for Project Name. enter Name for Drawn By. 14 On the Settings menu. 13 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 16 Click OK. click Project Information. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 11 On the Options Bar. Enter In Progress for Project Status. 15 In the Type Properties dialog.Modify titleblock properties 10 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 2005 for Project Issue Date. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 643 .

click Training Files. 644 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To change the units of measurement to meters. you create the dome roof with a revolved form.rvt. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. Set the Length units to millimeters. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. format the Area to use 2 decimal places.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. click Project Units. on the Settings menu. click Orient ➤ Southeast. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. set the Area to Square meters. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. and set the suffix to None. and open Common\c_Pantheon.

you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and click OK. click Create. and click OK. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. and double-click South. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown.Next. select Pick a Plane. 5 In the Name dialog. enter Dome for Name. 10 In the Go To View dialog. click Set Work Plane. select Roofs for Family Category. 8 In the Work Plane dialog. select Section: Wall Section . expand Elevations. and click Open View. 2 In the Project Browser.Center. expand Views (all). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 645 .

Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar.The center wall section view is displayed. click Lines. click Axis. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. click . 12 On the Options Bar. 646 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. click . 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point.

20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 647 . 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile.17 Move the cursor out. click . and select Chain. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. 19 On the Options Bar.

25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 27 On the Options Bar. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. click Lines. click . Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. 23 On the Options Bar. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. select Delete Inner Segment. 648 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click .

click . 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 649 . and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. click and select Chain. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. 32 On the Options Bar.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar.

38 In the Materials dialog. 37 In the Element Properties dialog.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. select Concrete . click Finish Family. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. click Revolution Properties. under Materials and Finishes. click OK. and click OK. 40 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. select Floors for Family Category. 41 On the Design Bar. 42 On the View toolbar. click for Material. click . click Create. and click OK. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog.The dome roof closed profile is now complete. click Finish Sketch. 650 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model.

select Section: Wall Section . 11 On the Options Bar. enter Concave Floor for Name. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. click . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 651 . and click OK.3 In the Name dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. select Pick a Plane. 6 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Work Plane dialog. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. click Axis. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. double-click South. click Set Work Plane.Center. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. and click OK. and click Open View. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. 9 In the Go To View dialog.

16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. click Lines. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. Footing level line and the axis. and select Chain. click . 15 Specify the intersection of the T. 652 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 On the Options Bar. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.O. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown.

Revit Architecture differs between templates for model families. click Revolution Properties. Appendix A . such as reference planes and sub-categories.Exploring Family Templates Revit Architecture ships with a large number of family templates. 22 In the Materials dialog. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T.O. select Cobblestone for Name. 24 On the Design Bar. Based on the template you select. Appendix A . 25 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. double-click 3D Section View. you start with the selection of a family template. click OK. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. and title blocks. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. annotation families. click Finish Family. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. When you create a new family.Exploring Family Templates | 653 .18 Specify the intersection of the T.O. the new family has specific default contents. click for Material. and click OK. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar.

Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. 654 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: None Casework wall based Family template for casework. Category: None Baluster .rft Baluster Description Family template for baluster families. Category: Casework Casework Family template for casework.Post Family template for posts of balusters. Contains sample wall geometry. The following table gives an overview of the templates for model families: Template Name *. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.Model Family Templates The templates for model families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates.

Includes the filled region tool. the column inherits the material of the wall. Category: Columns Curtain Wall Panel Family template for filling elements of curtain walls. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. If a column intersects a wall. contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. is used to create 2D detail components. Category: Detail Items Detail Component 2D family. Category: Detail Items Model Family Templates | 655 . includes the filled region tool.rft Description Column Family template to create columns.Template Name *. Category: Curtain Panels Detail Component line based 2D family.

Ceiling based families can only be placed on any ceiling in a project.rft Door . Category: Doors Electrical Equipment Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixture ceiling based Family template to create electrical equipment families. 656 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Curtain Wall Description Family template for door elements of curtain walls. Category: Curtain Panels Door Family template for doors.Template Name *. Contains a sample ceiling geometry.

Template Name *.rft Description Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture wall based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Furniture Model Family Templates | 657 . Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Electrical Fixtures Entourage Family template to create entourage families. Category: Furniture Systems Furniture Family template to create furniture families. Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Entourage Furniture System Family template to create furniture system families.

Category: Generic Models Generic Model face based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Generic Models 658 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Contains sample floor geometry. Contains a sample ceiling geometry.Template Name *.rft Generic Model ceiling based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling in a project. Category: Generic Models Generic Model floor based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Face based families can only be placed on any face in a project.

Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Generic Models Generic Model wall based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. Includes the filled region tool. Category: Generic Models Generic Model roof based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Roof based families can only be placed on any roof face in a project.Template Name *.rft Generic Model line based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Model Family Templates | 659 . Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Category: Generic Models Sample: Wall Opening with 2D graphics in plan view and a void extrusion. Contains sample roof geometry.

Contains sample floor geometry. Category: Lighting Fixtures 660 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Roof based families can only be placed on a roof face in a project. Contains sample roof geometry. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture roof based Family template to create lighting fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.Template Name *. Category: Generic Model Lighting Fixture floor based Family template to create lighting fixtures.rft Generic Model Description Family template to create any generic model geometry.

The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture wall based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture Family templates to create linear lighting fixtures. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Lighting Fixtures Model Family Templates | 661 . Category: Lighting Fixtures Linear Lighting Fixture floor based. Contains sample ceiling geometry. Linear Lighting Fixture wall based.Template Name *. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture Family template to create lighting fixtures. Ceiling based families can only be placed on a ceiling face in a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Linear Lighting Fixture roof based. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Wall based families can only be placed on a wall face in a project. Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures.rft Lighting Fixture ceiling based Description Family template to create lighting fixtures.

Faces of masses can be used to create other model elements like walls. Contains sample wall geometry. gross surface area.rft Mass Description Family template to create massing families. Category: Mechanical Equipment 662 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and roofs Massing families can also be generating floor area faces. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling faces in a project. Contains sample ceiling geometry.Template Name *. slabs. and gross floor areas. Category: Mass Sample: Mass families from the content library. Category: Mechanical Equipment Mechanical Equipment wall based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Masses can report gross volume. Mechanical Equipment ceiling based Family template to create mechanical equipment families.

Contains sample wall geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Model Family Templates | 663 . Category: Mechanical Equipment Parking Family template to create parking families. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Fixture Family template to create plumbing fixture families. Category: Planting Plumbing Fixture wall based Family template to create plumbing fixture families.Template Name *. Category: Parking Planting Family template to create planting families.rft Mechanical Equipment Description Family template to create mechanical equipment families.

slab edge.Template Name *. Profile usage (fascia. Families based on this template can be used in a project with the tools in the Modelling menu ➤ Host Sweeps. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Category: Profiles.rft Profile Description Family template to create 2D profiles. gutter. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. Profile-Reveal Family template to create 2D profiles for wall sweeps and wall reveals. Category: Profiles. Category: Profiles. Contains default reference planes Rail Centerline and Rail Top. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. mullion. Profile-Hosted Family template to create 2D profiles for hosts. 664 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Profiles. wall sweep) can be explicitly assigned under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Profile-Rail Family template to create 2D profiles for rails. A profile is only used in combination with system families. A profile is only used in combination with system families.

Category: Entourage Site Family template to create Site families. RPC Family Family template for models using the Real People Collection product family. Category: Profiles.rft Profile-Stair Nosing Description Family template to create 2D profiles for stair nosing. Category: Specialty Equipment Model Family Templates | 665 . Category: Site Speciality Equipment wall based Family template to create specialty equipment families. The family has an rpc file link included. Category: Specialty Equipment Speciality Equipment Family template to create specialty equipment families.Template Name *. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Contains sample wall geometry. A profile is used only in combination with system families.

Spot Lighting Fixture ceiling based. the column cuts out the wall. specific settings for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined.rft Spot Lighting Fixture floor based. The family has illumination and spot properties for the rendering tools. 666 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . If a structural column intersects a wall. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. Spot Lighting Fixture roof based. The family templates contain specific reference planes for members and stick symbols. such as beams and braces.Beams and Braces Family template to create structural framing families. Spot Lighting Fixture Structural Column Description Family templates to create spot lighting fixtures. If a structural foundation family is placed below a column. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. Beams can be placed on structural columns. Category: Structural Foundations Structural Framing .Template Name *. it moves its position if the base of the structural column is moved. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. A structural column can be defined as a room-bounding element if the structural material type is set to concrete or precast concrete. Category: Structural Columns Structural Foundation Family templates to create structural foundation families. Category: Lighting Fixtures Family template to create structural columns. specific setting for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. Spot Lighting Fixture wall based.

Category: Windows Model Family Templates | 667 .Curtain Wall Family template for window elements of curtain walls. Category: Structural Framing Window .Template Name *.rft Description Category: Structural Framing Structural Framing . Category: Curtain Panels Window with trim Family template for windows including trim on the exterior side. such as trusses.Complex and Trusses Family template to create structural framing families.

parameter text created with a text height of 2. A MultiCategory tag needs a shared parameter as filter parameter. In the family the intersection of the horizontal and right reference planes define connection location with the system section line. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Annotation families are scale-dependent. text. Category: Level Heads Family template for Multi-Category tags. Category: Windows Annotation Family Templates The templates for annotation families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Annotation. filled regions. Category: Callouts Family template for door tags. Category: Door Tags Family template for generic annotations. the same shared parameter is added to a project as a project parameter and can be used to filter selected elements to be tagged with the MultiCategory tag. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. click Tag ➤ Multi-Category to add a tag. Symbol size.rft Window Description Family template for windows. Category: Multi-Category Tags Family template for room tags. text size. The following table gives an overview of the templates for annotation families: Template Name *.0mm has a size of 2. and parameters.rft Callout Head Door Tag Generic Annotation Description Family template for the tag of a callout. Category: Room Tags Family template for section heads. Category: Generic Model Tags Family template for the grid heads. Category: Spot Elevation Symbols Generic Tag Grid Head Level Head Multi-Category Tag Room Tag Section Head Spot Elevation Symbol 668 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Section Marks Family template to define the symbol for spot elevations.0mm on a plotted sheet. On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Thus. The intersection of 2 reference planes defines the insertion point of a tag. Annotation families consist mainly of lines. and parameter text size are always related to the current scale of the View Control Bar. Category: Generic Annotation Family template for tags.Template Name *. Category: Grid Heads Family template for level heads.

rft ■ A3 metric. The following table gives an overview of the templates for title block families: Template Name Comments Family templates for title blocks using common standard sizes.rft ■ C .rft ■ E1 .36 x 24. all loaded title block families are listed for selection. the title block can be assigned to a sheet using View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.rft ■ A1 metric.42 x 30. In the Select a Titleblock dialog.rft ■ D . You import images to your title block.rft ■ A2 metric. and parameters.rft Titleblock Family Templates | 669 . Category: View Titles Family template for window tags.rft ■ B . Imperial ■ A .rft ■ A4 metric.Template Name *.rft Metric ■ A0 metric.rft ■ New Site Metric. filled regions.11 x 8.17 x 11. Title block families consist mainly of lines for the plan border.rft View Title Window Tag Description Family template to define view title of a view in a sheet.24 x 18.5. In a project. Category: Window Tags Titleblock Family Templates The templates for titleblock families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Titleblocks. text.

670 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Parametric Component Design Techniques 17 In this tutorial. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit Architecture 2008. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. methodology. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. not specifically how to make a floor truss. 671 . you will understand the process. The truss also has multiple types. In exercises that become increasingly complex. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. At the end of this tutorial. During this tutorial. and detail level controls. In this case. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. formula-based parameters. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. assigned subcatecories.

you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. beams. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. NOTE When creating a new family. you should avoid over-designing the component. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. this must be a structural beam component. In this case. Although this solution is possible. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 672 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. and also works intuitively with them. For every complexity added to a family. and structural walls. In this case. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. It should also be an available option within a beam system. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. you determine the requirements of the new component. In addition. In the next exercise. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. it is not the best solution. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. a generic floor-based component might work. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. Take this into consideration during your design planning.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. For training purposes. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. Two types should be created. In this lesson. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes.

Depending on the family you are designing. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. These materials can be applied using Object Styles.For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 673. In addition. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. 4 Continue with the next exercise. the planning stage and questions may differ. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. such as wood type. Selecting the Family Template | 673 . would require Instance or Type parameters. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. In the previous exercise. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required.

scroll to the structural framing templates. Select it so that the preview displays. you will access them from the Training Files folder. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). In addition. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. However. 4 Scroll through the various template options. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. Like most generic family templates.Beams and Braces. and open Metric\Templates. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. 6 In the New dialog. ■ Metric Structural Framing .Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. There are two structural framing templates provided. The New dialog opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog. Usually. this is where you access family templates.rft 674 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . On the right side of the New dialog. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. click Training Files. notice the preview. to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.rft. for example: wall based or floor based. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project.

Beams and Braces. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. This template is the best starting point for the new family. it is not the best starting point for the beam family.rft and notice the preview. Floor Plan: Ref. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing .This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping.Beams and Braces.Complex and Trusses. and notice the preview. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. Because of its simplicity. 10 Maximize the view. Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. spacing.rft. Floor Plan: Ref. ■ Metric Structural Framing . Level. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. Level Selecting the Family Template | 675 . Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing .Complex and Trusses. 8 Select Metric Structural Framing . and display functions required by structural beams.rft to open it. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back).rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses.

under Elevations. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. 12 In the Project Browser. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. Therefore. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. under 3D Views. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. double-click Ref. you add reference planes to the beam design. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 676. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. lines. Level. Reference Plane: Left. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. however. double-click Front. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice.In this view. 11 In the Project Browser. Like many templates. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. 676 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you add the reference planes. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. double-click View 1. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family.

In the image below. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 677 . The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. In the project plan view image below. notice the location of the beam extents.

You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. Before adding new reference planes.These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). click Ref Plane. 678 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. click . Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. In a later exercise. you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep.

The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task.Add ref. double-click Front. click Ref Plane. Adding Reference Planes | 679 . click . click Ref Plane. These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. Level. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. select the lower horizontal reference plane. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. Level. under Elevations. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. and select the Level: Ref. click on the Edit toolbar. click to place it. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. To do this. Level as the mirror axis. 10 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar.

and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. click to place it as shown. click to place it as shown. specify an Offset of 200 mm. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 19 On the Options Bar. click to place it as shown. 680 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. Before you move on to the next exercise.16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase.

click to place it as shown. under Floor Plans. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view.20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). Adding Reference Planes | 681 . Level. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). 22 On the Options Bar. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. double-click Ref. specify an Offset of 238 mm. click to place it as shown. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. which you do in the next exercise. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. 24 In the Project Browser. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it.

click Modify. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. In the following exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. Make sure you remember where you saved it. 26 Starting with one of the reference planes you added to define the center chase. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. Repeat this step for the remaining extents so that your plan view resembles the image below. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. 28 In the Save As dialog. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 682. you add dimensions and constraints to the to the skeleton. and click Save. You have finished creating the initial skeleton of the open web wood floor truss. select the reference plane and adjust the extents similar to the image below. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial.25 On the Design Bar. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. 682 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .

After adding the dimension. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. click Dimension. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 683 . Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. 6 On the Design Bar. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown.Dataset Continue to use the dataset. click Modify. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. Wood Floor Truss. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. click Dimension. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. click . that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar.rfa. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane.

and the lower horizontal reference plane. 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. 684 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. under Elevations. double-click Front.7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. place the dimension to the left as shown. click Dimension. Level. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. the Center reference plane. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. Place the dimension as shown.

Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. add two dimensions as shown.Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 685 . and place it below the dimension you added previously. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. 15 Add four dimensions as shown.

“Creating New Length Parameters” on page 686. under Floor Plans. Wood Floor Truss. you will add additional reference planes.You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. In this exercise. In the next exercise. and constraints as needed. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. consider making it a type parameter. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. When you design a new family. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. Throughout the tutorial. Level. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. consider making it an instance parameter. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. consider making it a type parameter. If the component has material that varies per component. double-click Ref. it becomes a parameter. In addition.rfa. dimensions. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. 686 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor.

select Add parameter for Label. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Select Type. Creating New Length Parameters | 687 . select Family parameter. select Add parameter for Label. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. select Family parameter. Select Type. ■ Click OK. double-click Front. enter Depth for Name. under Elevations. Under Parameter Data.3 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Click OK. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Under Parameter Data. enter Chord Width for Name.

Create center chase width parameter
9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

10 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data, enter Center Chase Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

Create chord thickness parameter
12 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown.

13 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.

688 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter Chord Thickness for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.

Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions
15 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar, select Chord Thickness for Label.

17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.

Creating New Length Parameters | 689

18 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. In the Family Types dialog, notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group, Dimensions. When you load this family into a project, these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog for the beam. 19 Click Cancel. 20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Flexing the Component Model” on page 690.

Flexing the Component Model
One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. Flexing the model means to change parameter values, thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. This is not limited to length parameters. If you add a new material parameter, you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. You should flex the model after any major change to the design.

You should flex a new family after:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Adding or modifying an element. Adding or modifying a parameter. Adding a new constraint. Nesting a component. Adding or modifying a parameter formula.

When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog, rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.

690 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Preparing the family for flexing
1 When flexing the model, you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog:

Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner. or

Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.

Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog so that you can view the model.

Flex the truss depth
3 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 600 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Level. In addition, notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing.

Flexing the Component Model | 691

4 Enter 450 mm for Depth, 80 mm for Chord Thickness, 800 mm for Center Chase Width, and click Apply. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.

Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog, reset the parameters back to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 300 mm for Depth. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply. Click OK.

When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. 6 On the File menu, click Save. 7 Proceed to the next lesson, “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 693.

692 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Adding Solid Geometry
In this lesson, you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. After creating the extrusions, you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After flexing the design, you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.

Creating Solid Extrusions
In this exercise, you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. After adding the chords, you align and lock their position. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add chord extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design.

3 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog, click Name, select Reference Plane: Member Left, and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and select Lock.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.

Adding Solid Geometry | 693

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

When using the Trim tool, click the part of the line you want to keep. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.

694 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry.

17 On the File menu, click Save. 18 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry” on page 695.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Constrain the extrusion ends
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Enter SD; this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 3 Select the chord extrusions.

4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 695

5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Flex the design
6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog is open. On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. 8 In the Family Types dialog, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Add a new dimension and constraint
9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

696 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment.

Flex the length
12 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 13 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working.

TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards, flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. 14 Click OK.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 697

In a later exercise, you add the web members. Therefore, you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.

Flex the chord width, depth, and thickness
15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. 16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges.

17 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 18 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 600mm for Depth. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. TIP When flexing, it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Therefore, try picking a method, such as doubling, that allows you to easily return to the original values.

Click Apply.

The chords should adjust to each of the new values. 19 Specify the beam values shown below:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply, and click OK.

20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Additional Solid Geometry” on page 698.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase.

Dataset

698 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add the center chase extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 3 On the View Control Bar, click the Hide/Isolate control, and click Hide Element. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the left, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left, vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the right, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 699

NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 17 Zoom in on the center chase.

Align and lock the new extrusions
18 On the Tools menu, click Align. This next process is very important. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion, it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. 19 For the align-to reference, select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.

700 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions, and after the alignment, click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.

21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the center chase
23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 24 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints. 25 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

Clean up the view
26 Zoom to Fit.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 701

27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. This will make subsequent work much easier.

Add the truss end extrusions
28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown.

29 On the Options Bar, select Add Parameter for Label. 30 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. 32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 34 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Sketch the right end extrusion
35 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 37 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 38 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name, and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

702 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

41 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.

42 On the Options Bar, enter19mm for Offset. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

44 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 703

46 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. 48 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch the left end extrusion
49 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 51 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 52 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name, and click OK. 53 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 54 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

55 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 56 On the Options Bar, enter 19mm for Offset. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

704 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

58 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

60 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 61 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 62 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add alignment constraints
63 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends, they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 65 On the Tools menu, click Align. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point.

67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 705

68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion; this is the align-to point. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side. TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. 71 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the design
72 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 73 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 74 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply, and click OK.

75 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

76 Save the Family. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. If you are comfortable with your design, you can continue using it in the next lesson. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way, you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. 77 Proceed to the next lesson, “Testing the Family in a Project” on page 707.

706 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Testing the Family in a Project
In this lesson, you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. After you load it into the project, you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt.

Loading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls, a sill, and a rim joist. NOTE Close any open families or projects. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. Although you could continue using the previous family, it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. Datasets

Open the truss family
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa.

Open the project file

Click File menu ➤ Open.

Testing the Family in a Project | 707

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF1.rvt.

Load the truss family into the project
1 On the Window menu, clickm_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. If you had multiple projects or families open, a dialog would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Notice that the project file is now active. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Families, expand Structural Framing, and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. 4 Proceed to the next exercise, “Testing a Family Instance in a Project” on page 708.

Testing a Family Instance in a Project
In this exercise, you add several instances of the truss family to the project, and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.

708 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. double-click Level 1. expand 3D Views. therefore. 6 Using point-to-point insertion. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. 2 In the Project Browser. This project consists of foundation walls. expand Views. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click Structural. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 709 . TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Beam. verify that Chain is not selected. right-click in the Design Bar.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. a wood sill. and a wood rim joist.Southeast Isometric. and double-click 3D . under Floor Plans. a slab. 4 In the Type Selector. The rim joist was added as a beam. 5 On the Options Bar.

double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. 710 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .Southeast Isometric. double-click 3D . 9 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. 8 In the Project Browser. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. not the wall or rim joist.NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. You do not need to be precise. 7 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.

click Save as. under 3D Views. Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes.10 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. double-click 3D . The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 711 . This should return the project to its original dimension. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. 13 In the Save as dialog. 11 On the Edit menu.Southeast Isometric. In the next lesson. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. click Undo Drag. 12 On the File menu.

under Floor Plans. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. click Hide/Isolate. 2 In the Project Browser. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. 5 On the File menu. 4 On the View Control Bar. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1.Edit a family from within a project 14 Select one of the wooden truss components. Level. 16 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. click Yes. Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. and click Hide Element. Because the family is already open. and open Metric\Families\m_Wood_Web. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. double-click Ref. “Working with Nested Subcomponents” on page 712. click Training Files. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. Load the wood web family ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 On the Options Bar. 712 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 17 Proceed to the next lesson.rfa.rfa is the active file. click Edit Family. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson.

13 For the align-to point. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. 10 In the Project Browser. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. click Modify. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase.This family is a single extrusion as shown. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. 9 On the Design Bar. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. You will align the left web component first. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. Adding a Nested Component | 713 . double-click Front. click Component. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. Do not select it. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. 7 In the Type Selector. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. under Elevations. This will make aligning the wood web easier. Align the nested web components 12 Enter AL. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. In the following steps. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown.

In addition. click Modify. Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson.14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. click Ref Plane. 16 On the Design Bar. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. 18 Add two reference planes as shown. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. 714 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints.

you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component.19 On the Tools menu. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. 25 Add the following two dimensions: Adding a Nested Component | 715 . click Align. In the steps that follow. 23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width.

Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. Place the dimension as shown. ■ In the next exercise. 2 In the Family Types dialog. or the width of the center chase. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. “Creating Formula-controlled Parameters” on page 716. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. click Family Types. 27 On the File menu. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name.Left web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. you label these dimensions. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. click Modify. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. 716 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Parameters. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. length. 28 In the Save As dialog. ■ Right web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. click Add. you add new parameters to control the web components. click Save As. Place the dimension as shown. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. 26 On the Design Bar.

Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. Click OK. When you refer to another parameter within a formula.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. 5 Click OK. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. In addition. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select WebDepth.3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Other. and click Element Properties. Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. Select Type. click Edit/New. under Constraints. click OK. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. 4 In the Family Types dialog. Select Length for Type. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. under Parameter Data. enter Depth . This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog to facilitate typing within the formula field. and click OK. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. In the Type Properties dialog. Select Common for Discipline. click OK. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 717 .

Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase
13 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 14 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:

Enter CC for Name. This parameter is primarily for convenience. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.

Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter
17 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

19 Under Constraints, enter (Length - (CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends, which must remain at least 150mm long.

Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter
20 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayNum for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Integer for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

22 Under Constraints, enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. 23 Click OK.

718 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Add parameter to anchor web array
24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Webhalflength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. 28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Add formula for Webhalflength
30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 31 Under Constraints, enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. 32 Click OK. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 719

Associate web component parameters
33 Right-click the left web component, and click Element Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select WebArrayLength, and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog, the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. 37 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK. 38 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 40 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.

Flex the design
41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog. 42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

44 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness.

720 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Click Apply, and click OK.

45 On the File menu, click Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Arraying Nested Subcomponents” on page 721.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents
In this exercise, you array the nested web components, add alignment constraints, and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.

Array the left web component
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase.

3 On the Edit menu, click Array. Creating an array requires two basic steps. First, you specify the move start point; then you specify the move end point. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. 4 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 721

6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

7 Press ENTER to complete the array. 8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Array the right nested web component
9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 10 On the Edit menu, click Array. 11 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom out to view the truss.

Align and lock the arrays
17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. 18 On the Tools menu, click Align.

722 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

19 In the left array, place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights, then select the line twice.

Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.

21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.

22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss.

Label the arrays
23 Select the middle web component of the left array. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it.

NOTE Do not select the array value. 25 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. 28 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 723

30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.

33 Delete the dimension. 34 On the Tools menu, click Align. 35 Select the reference plane, Left, as the align-to point. 36 Select the reference plane, Member Left, and lock the alignment as shown.

Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value.

724 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

NOTE With most beam families, you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes; however, in this case, the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Therefore, this solution has little, if any, significant impact. 37 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.

41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Change trimmable end length value
42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. 44 Click Apply, and click OK. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends.

Flex the design
45 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1, and prepare the view for flexing. 46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 47 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 12000mm for Length. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 725

TIP When flexing a complex model such as this, you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly; however, for training and time purposes, these steps have been reduced. 48 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 6000mm for Length. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. 49 On the File menu, click Save. 50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Reloading a Family into a Project” on page 726.

Reloading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you reload the truss family into the project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length.

726 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. In addition to the truss family, the project, m_WWF1.rvt, should be open. Close any other open projects.

Reload the truss into the project.
1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View, View 1, displays. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 3 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes.

4 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. 6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes.

Reloading a Family into a Project | 727

7 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. In the next lesson, you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. 9 Proceed to the next lesson, “Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters” on page 728.

Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters
In this lesson, you create and apply subcategories and materials. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application.

Creating and Applying Subcategories
In this exercise, you create new subcategories within the truss family. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF2.rvt.

728 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this dataset, the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In addition, four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.

Apply Object Styles
1 Zoom in around beam system. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Within the family, the material values were set to By Category by default.

2 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 3 In the Object Styles dialog, verify that the Model Objects tab is selected, and expand the category Structural Framing. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. In addition, notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. 4 On the Structural Framing category line, click in the material field until the button displays as shown.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 729

5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. 6 In the Materials dialog, click Wood - Timber for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. Notice the Wood - Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components.

When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control over component visibility within a project. 8 On the Edit menu, click Undo Object Styles.

Create subcategories within the truss family
9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 10 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 12 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 13 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss for Name, and click OK.

Apply material to subcategory
15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 16 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 17 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. 18 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

19 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 20 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 21 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.

Apply the subcategory to the truss components
22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Other, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.

730 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

25 On the Options Bar, click

.

26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory, and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Apply a subcategory to the nested web components
28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components, press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. 29 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. The web component family opens in a 3D view.

31 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 32 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Name, and click OK. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components, you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 731

34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss - Webs subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 35 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 36 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs, and click OK. 37 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

38 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 39 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 40 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. 41 Select the web extrusion. 42 On the Options Bar, click .

43 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Subcategory, and click OK.

Reload web component into truss family
44 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 46 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.

Reload truss into project
47 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 49 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components.

50 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 51 In the Object Styles dialog, under Categories, expand Structural Framing.

732 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Notice the two new subcategories are listed. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. 52 Click OK. 53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss Webs, and click OK. Notice the web extrusions no longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.

55 On the Edit menu, click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 56 On the File menu, click Save As. 57 In the Save as dialog, navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Material Parameters” on page 733.

Creating Material Parameters
In this exercise, you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise.

Open truss family for editing
1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create material parameter
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Material for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

7 In the Family Types dialog, notice the default material is By Category.

Creating Material Parameters | 733

In this case, do not assign a material to the parameter. When reloaded into a project, this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. 8 Click OK.

Link truss extrusions to material parameter
9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 10 On the Options Bar, click .

11 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the button to the right of the Material value field. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components, press TAB, and select the component. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 21 Click OK twice. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 29 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Steel for Name, and click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.

734 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

32 On the File menu, click Save. 33 On the File menu, click Close. 34 Close any open files. You can save the open files if you wish. In the next lesson, a new dataset is supplied. 35 Proceed to the next lesson, “Controlling Component Visibility” on page 735.

Controlling Component Visibility
In this lesson, you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls
In this exercise, you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels.

Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF3.rvt.

Change detail levels
1 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Controlling Component Visibility | 735

Notice the rim joist no longer displays. However, notice the floor truss has not changed appearance, because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the truss, all elements display at all times in all views.

2 Select a floor truss. 3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Apply detail level controls to web components
5 Select a web component. 6 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 8 Select the web extrusion. 9 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

11 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 13 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.

Assign detail level to center chase extrusions
14 Select the center chase extrusions. 15 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

736 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Assign detail level to truss ends
17 Select the end extrusions. 18 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Assign detail level to truss chords
20 Select the truss chords. 21 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■

Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF3.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed.

26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls | 737

Notice the symbolic representation of the beams.

29 On the File menu, click Save As. 30 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. 31 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating Component Types” on page 738.

Creating Component Types
In this lesson, you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. In the final exercise, you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length.

Creating Multiple Component Types
In this exercise, you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project, creating predefined types can speed up the design process.

Open the truss family for editing
1 Select a floor truss. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create new types
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 6 In the New dialog, enter 89x38 for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 8 In the New dialog, enter 64x38 for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 64mm for Chord Width, and click Apply. Notice the chord changes width. 10 Select 89x38 for Name, and click Apply. The truss returns to its original designed value. NOTE When creating new components, create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 11 Click OK.

738 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

and click Yes. Creating Conditional Formulas | 739 . 400. Notice the two beam types. Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise.Southeast Isometric. 2 On the Options Bar. “Creating Conditional Formulas” on page 739. 20 On the Design Bar. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. 400))) 6 Click Apply. select Override parameter values of existing types. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. under Dimensions.rvt. click Edit Family. and click OK. if(Length < 7500. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. click Save. 350. double-click 3D . 13 In the Load into Projects dialog. 18 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 286. click Load into Projects. select m_WWF3.TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. 21 In the Project Browser. click Beam. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. <result-if-true>. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. if(Length < 9000. select 64x38. under 3D Views. click Family Types. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. 22 On the File menu. 14 In the Reload Family dialog. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. select 89x38. 16 In the Type Selector.

click Load into Projects. enter 8000 for length. Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. select Override parameter values of existing types. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families.rvt.Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK.Southeast Isometric. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. 16 On the File menu. click Save. under 3D Views. 14 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog. 8 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. click Apply. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. enter 6000 for length. and click Yes. 740 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Notice the truss depth increases. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. under Floor Plans. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. 17 Close any open files. double-click 3D . Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. You have completed this tutorial. select m_WWF3. double-click Level 1. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. 11 In the Reload Family dialog.

Using Advanced Features 7 741 .

742 | Chapter 18 Using Advanced Features .

A typical curtain system comprises a wall. 743 . you need to select a panel. you need to change the length of the wall. Like walls. Unlike windows. and mullions. and you can change these elements individually. grid lines. This affects the entire curtain system. and they are not windows. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. To switch panel types. or you can use a specific curtain system command. you select the grid. panel. To change grids.Curtain Systems 18 Curtain systems are not walls. to resize the system. Like windows. For example. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior.

Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. 1 In the Project Browser. 744 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . click Wall. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a curtain system using the wall command. 4 In the Type Selector. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. and double-click Ground Floor.rvt.

expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 8 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. Creating an Entrance | 745 . 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. and double-click Southeast Isometric. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown.

using curtain grids. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. top constraint. 746 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Click OK. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. and click (Properties). 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel.11 Select the curtain system. under Floor Plans. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. top and base attachments. enter 1200. For Top Offset. and room bounding. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint.

16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. click Modify. and resize the crop boundary as shown. right-click Elevation 1 . 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 26 While pressing CTRL.a. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. SIXTH FLOOR. FIFTH FLOOR. and click OK. click Curtain Grid. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the drawing area. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. click Elevation. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. while pressing CTRL. select SECOND FLOOR. 25 On the Design Bar. and click Rename.15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. Creating an Entrance | 747 . and SEVENTH FLOOR. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. FOURTH FLOOR. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. THIRD FLOOR.

Click to create a vertical grid. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel.The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. click Modify. one larger than the other. Click to place another grid line. 748 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. 33 On the Design Bar. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels.

Instead of using the Door command. and on the Options Bar. click Add or Remove Segments.Next. The segment line style changes to dashed. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. you add a doorway to the curtain system. Creating an Entrance | 749 . You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. and then select the segment above it. The two segments are removed.

39 On the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 40 On the Options Bar.38 Using the same method. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 42 Place dimensions as shown. select One Segment. 750 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . and lock them.

click Modify. Creating an Entrance | 751 . 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use the following image as a guide. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. click Training Files. 54 On the Design Bar. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. Next.43 Delete the dimensions. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid).rfa. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. click in any white space to exit the editor. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 52 On the Type Selector. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. The panel changes to a double door.

61 With the panel still selected. 56 In the Project Browser. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 65 On the View Control Bar. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 60 On the Type Selector. under Elevations. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. and the solid panels display in white. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. click . and click Wireframe.These panels schedule as doors. 55 In the Project Browser. Next. click . They are part of the curtain panel category. not as curtain panels. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The glazed panels display in blue. This changes the graphics style of the view. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Now. under Floor Plans. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 752 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . double-click Entrance Elevation. 57 On the View Control Bar. click System Panel : Solid. 63 Click OK twice. on the new curtain system you added.

66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 2 On the Options Bar. click Mullion. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 68 On the File menu. click Save As. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 753 .rvt. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. select Entire Grid Line. select Grid Line Segment. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. select All Empty Segments. 754 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. there are a few that you do not want. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. Two mullion join controls display. You are going to change some mullion joins. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. so you remove them next. because their width reduces the size of the doors. 9 Delete the mullions below them.6 On the Options Bar. Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. however. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click.

14 On the Design Bar. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. double-click Southeast Isometric. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins.The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. click Modify. 13 Click the top mullion control. 15 In the Project Browser. Finally. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 16 Save the file. you can also right-click. Curved Curtain System | 755 . you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. you add a curtain system using the wall command. Finally.

specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. For Top Offset. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 5 Click . 7 On the Options Bar. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. under Floor Plans. (Arc passing through three points). Click OK. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 1200. click Wall. 756 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. double-click GROUND FLOOR.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. for Top Constraint.

eighths. click Curtain Grid. Adding a Curved Curtain System | 757 . Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. under Elevations. 14 In the Project Browser. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. and then sixteenths. 16 On the Design Bar. you change some panels in the system. double-click East. Next. Next. You are going to use one of these snaps points.The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. you place grids on the system. 15 Zoom in to the cylinder. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. click Modify. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. Divide the halves into quarters. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

click .Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box.rft. enter 100. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files. double-click Exterior. Remember to click elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. select Basic Wall: Generic . select the bottom layer of panels.300mm. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 3 In the Project Browser. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Lines. for Depth. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. and on the Options Bar. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. 758 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . to filter out all other 19 Save the file. 4 On the Design Bar. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. 18 In the Type Selector. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel.

click Model Lines.rfa family. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. All fourth floor panels are selected.Pattern. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. right-click. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 12 On the Options Bar. clear Chain.rfa. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 759 . 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 14 On the Design Bar. and return to the project file. 21 In the Type Selector. 11 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the extrusion. 19 In the Project Browser. . click Modify. select Curtain Panel .Pattern. under Floor Plans. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 18 Load the Curtain Panel .8 On the Design Bar. and click .Pattern. click Finish Sketch. and save the family as Curtain Panel . 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. select Glass. and click OK.

22 Select the curved arc curtain wall.Solid. All the panels change to the solid panel. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. click (Default 3D View). 23 Right-click. under Floor Plans. 27 Highlight a panel in the arc. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. and then click (Dynamically Modify View). 760 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 25 Hold SHIFT and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 26 In the Project Browser. and click Flip Orientation. All fifth floor panels are selected. 24 On the View toolbar. 29 Save the file. select System Panel . right-click. 28 In the Type Selector. double-click FIFTH FLOOR.

If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. click Lines. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. for Profile Usage. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Select Radius. and enter 50 mm for the radius. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. double-click East. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 761 .rft. 1 In the Project Browser. and select it. 8 On the Design Bar. select Mullion. click ■ ■ For Sides. and click OK. click Mullion. Click again to specify the ending point. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. under Elevations. For vertical mullions. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 8. . 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. click Training Files. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon).Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog.

19 On the Design Bar.11 On the Design Bar. clear Coarse and Medium. select Circular Mullion for Family. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. it can be added as a mullion type. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 762 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 13 On the Options Bar. and click Visibility. click Detail Component.rfa.rfa. click Modify. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 28 Click . click Modify. clear Fine. double-click Southeast Isometric. under 3D Views. 17 On the Design Bar. and click OK.rfa family. and return to the project file. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 27 In the Project Browser.detail. click Visibility. After the new profile is loaded. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. click Training Files. 30 Click . This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 20 Select the detail component. click Mullion.

Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 763 . 38 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 41 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 40 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 36 Click OK twice.32 Click Edit/New. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. and then apply those custom elements to the system. right-click. 43 Save the file. you learned to create a curved curtain system. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 37 On the Options Bar. 42 Press DELETE. for Profile. double-click GROUND FLOOR. so you remove the unwanted ones. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. and click OK. You have placed more mullions than you want. In this lesson. make custom curtain panels and mullions. select All Empty Segments. 34 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 35 Under Construction. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 39 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion.

For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. Click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems.Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. 9 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. and press TAB. 764 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. 4 On the Design Bar. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. click Finish Roof. 5 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. All the inside faces highlight. 7 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. TIP To chain select all the walls. click Roof Properties. click Pick Walls. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. select Defines slope. and you can click to select them all. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. and a ruled curtain system. enter 600. double-click TOP OF ROOF. a storefront system.

click Mullion. 1 In the Project Browser. select Entire Grid Line. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. under 3D Views. Storefront System | 765 . under Floor Plans. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 16 On the Design Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. 14 On the Options Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. click Modify. Storefront System In this exercise. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 18 Save the file. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 17 On the View Control Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR.10 In the Project Browser. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

766 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. and enter 2400. click Wall. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 4 In the Type Selector. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. select Unconnected for Height. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Storefront System | 767 . you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 12 Select the storefront wall. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. To see how the grid layout is defined. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. For this wall. enter 10200 mm. double-click Southeast Isometric. which is specified in the type. 8 Click the temporary dimension. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. under 3D Views. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. and press ENTER. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar. even if the wall height changes.The curtain wall cuts the original wall. and click . click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. 10 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. This specifies an exact length for the wall.

20 Save the file. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. or end. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. Justification. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. you find Number. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 19 Select a curtain grid. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. select All Empty Segments. double-click Southeast Isometric. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. center. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. 768 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . In this exercise. Angle. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 18 On the Options Bar. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. By setting the Angle value. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. and Offset. enter 15. 16 Click OK. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under 3D Views. click Mullion. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. see the Revit Architecture help.

6 Click the highlighted line. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. and highlight the model line.3 On the View Control Bar. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Curtain System by Lines | 769 . making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted.

NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. quarters. 11 Click OK. and then eighths. 10 Select the panel. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. 770 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . click Modify. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. click Curtain Grid. and click . 9 On the Design Bar. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. Next. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. A panel between the 2 lines is created.8 Select the highlighted line.

you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. 18 Save the file. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. 16 In the Type Selector. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. Curtain System by Lines | 771 . Finally. embed a curtain system inside another wall. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. and define a ruled curtain system. quarters. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system.This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. select System Panel : Solid. and then eighths. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. right-click.

772 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

you learn how to add fascia. 773 .Roofs 19 In this tutorial. gutters. In addition. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2008. and soffits to the roofs that you create.

and double-click Level 1. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. 1 In the Project Browser. You do not need to create the work plane. expand Views (all). Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Click OK. and open Metric\m_Roofs. expand Floor Plans. shed. select Name. Before you can sketch the roof profile. including hip. and click OK. click Training Files. 5 In the Go To View dialog. 774 | Chapter 19 Roofs . you learn to create several different types of roofs. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. In this lesson. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise.Creating Roofs In this lesson. and mansard roofs. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. In the left pane of the Open dialog. gable. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof.rvt. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway.

9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. centerline. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. click the blue square on the witness line. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. Creating an Extruded Roof | 775 . 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially.The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. click Ref Plane. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. and so on).

sketch the roof profile. click Lines. 776 | Chapter 19 Roofs . Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. select Chain. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 13 On the Options Bar.

click . use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. click to display the model. Creating an Extruded Roof | 777 . Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 19 On the Tools toolbar. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 18 Select the edge of the roof. 17 On the Tools toolbar. 16 On the View toolbar.The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click . and then select the exterior face of the wall. The roof should resemble the following illustration. Next. press TAB.

23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 778 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 24 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. 26 On the View toolbar. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click Attach for Top/Base. and double-click Section 1. expand Sections (Type 1). 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. “Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint” on page 778. click Modify. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. expand Views (all). and select the second wall. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. press CTRL. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.

rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. clear Defines slope. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. click Pick Walls. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. and enter 600 for Overhang. 2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 779 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. By default. verify that Defines slope is selected. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Next. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. m_Roofs. click . click Modify. 5 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. and on the Options Bar. 7 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 9 Press CTRL. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 6 On the Options Bar. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. select both slope definition lines. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. 4 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line.

13 On the View toolbar. and enter 600 for Overhang. clear Defines slope. and double-click Level 3. When you complete the roof. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click Finish Roof. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. 12 When you see the informational dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. 780 | Chapter 19 Roofs . expand Views (all). NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. “Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint” on page 780. expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Dimensions. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Pick Walls. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof.rvt. and click OK. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. 1 In the Project Browser.

5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 781 . Next. 13 On the Options Bar. 9 Using automatic snaps. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. click Lines. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 10 On the View menu. click . Next. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click Modify. select Defines Slope. 8 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. sketch the chimney opening. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 6 Click to select all the walls. add new slope lines to the roof. press TAB.

click Finish Roof. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. click to view the new roof in the model. Next. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 782. and enter 600 for Overhang. select Defines Slope. and double-click Level 2. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house.15 On the Options bar. expand Views (all). 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. close the roof sketch. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 17 When you see the informational dialog. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 18 On the View toolbar. m_Roofs. 3 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. expand Floor Plans. 782 | Chapter 19 Roofs . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint.

and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 10 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 14 Under Constraints. and click . Next. 11 To trim the first line segment. Next. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines Slope. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. The Element Properties dialog is displayed.6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click Finish Roof. click Roof Properties. 7 On the Options Bar. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. select the left vertical slope definition line. using the following illustration for guidance. click Lines. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 9 On the Tools toolbar. 16 On the View toolbar. click to display the model. click . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 783 .

use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Next. 18 On the Design Bar. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. click Modify. join the two remaining walls to the roof. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 784 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.17 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 23 On the Tools toolbar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click .

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click Pick Walls. “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 785.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. expand Floor Plans. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. and double-click Level 2. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 785 . m_Roofs. clear Defines Slope. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. expand Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and enter 300 for Overhang. enter 0 for Overhang.

16 Under Constraints. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. Next. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. you add a slope-defining line. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 10 To trim the first line segment. click Roof Properties. Next. click Modify. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 786 | Chapter 19 Roofs . and press ENTER. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 13 On the Options Bar. select the left vertical roof line. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 Click 20 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope.7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. click . 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 9 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. select Defines slope. to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level.

14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. you need to add two reference planes. expand Views (all). click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. verify is selected. 4 In the Project Browser. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. click Ref Plane. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Before you can add slope arrows. To help locate the position of each split. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 787 . you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 3 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar.21 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 3D. 7 On the Options Bar. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. click Modify. m_Roofs. add two new slope arrows. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. and double-click Level 2. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 9 On the Tools menu.rvt. click Split Walls and Lines. “Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof” on page 787. and enter 600 for Offset. click Slope Arrow. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. click . expand Views (all). expand 3D Views. 5 On the View menu. expand Floor Plans. clear Defines Slope. Next. 12 On the Options Bar.

and then click OK. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Garage Roof.rvt. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. and move the cursor to place the arrow. the adjacent eave heights must align. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 788 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 1 In the Project Browser. select Slope for Specify. When eave heights differ. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 5 On the Options Bar.15 to add the second slope arrow. expand Views (all). 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays.15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. click Modify. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. and click 19 Under Constraints. When you sketch a hip roof. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). m_Roofs. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. select both slope arrows. 20 Under Dimensions. 18 Press CTRL. “Aligning Roof Eaves” on page 788. click Edit. select Defines Slope. . 23 Proceed to the next exercise.

15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Align Eaves. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. click . 10 On the Options Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof | 789 . you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. click Save As. and click OK. When aligning eaves. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Next. click Finish Roof. The eave lines display with a dimension. 14 If you want to save your changes. “Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 789. on the File menu. select a method to align the eaves. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the Options Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Dimensions. click to display the model. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 13 On the View toolbar. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave.6 With the two gable end lines selected. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 790 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Training Files. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 6 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. on the Options Bar. 3 Select the roof and. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click to display the model.rvt. and double-click North. under Constraints. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. expand Elevations. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. click . and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof.

click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. and soffits in Revit Architecture. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Roof. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click Lines. click . and click OK.Next. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. After you create a roof. Gutters. on the File menu. and select the remaining three lines. Creating Fascia. 17 On the View toolbar. Creating Fascia. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you learn how to create roof fascia. and soffits. press TAB. and double-click Level 3. and Soffits In this lesson. under Dimensions. gutters. expand Floor Plans. click . 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click Save As. Gutters. and then select Defines slope. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and Soffits | 791 . 18 If you want to save your changes. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. gutters. click Modify. you can easily create its fascia.

9 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Built-up Fascia. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 792 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. click . 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. under Construction. and open Common\c_Condominium. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. and click Open. and click OK. click Training Files. 3 Press CTRL. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 8 In the Name dialog. and click OK twice.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. click Duplicate. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up.rfa. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove.rvt. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family.

. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. under Construction. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. “Creating Gutters” on page 793. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Properties dialog. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. click . 10 Click to place the gutter.rvt. click Duplicate. c_Condominium. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. and click OK.13 On the Design Bar. click in the Value field for Material. click Edit/New. 2 On the Options Bar. and click OK three times. Creating Gutters | 793 . 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Metal-Aluminum for Name.

expand Views. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 1 In the Project Browser. 794 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 3 On the Design Bar. 4 Select the roof. c_Condominium. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Soffits In this exercise.rvt. “Creating Soffits” on page 794. click Pick Roofs. and double-click Roof.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

click Join Geometry. 6 In the Project Browser.5 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and then select the soffit to join them. 9 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and double-click 3D. expand 3D Views. Creating Soffits | 795 . 7 On the Tools menu. click Finish Sketch. on the File menu. 8 Select the roof.

796 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships.Area Analysis 20 In this tutorial. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. 797 . Finally. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes.

you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click OK. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. If you are using metric units. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. 2 In the Project Units dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. click Settings. select mm. under Length. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the final exercise. select Millimeters. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. For Rounding. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. and click Room and Area. select Square meters. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. expand Floor Plans. For Unit Suffix. These schemes define spatial relationships. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. 3 Under Area. For Unit Suffix. and open Common\c_Area. click Training Files. right-click in the Design Bar. 798 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis .Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. your values will be different. select m2 Click OK. click the Area Schemes tab.rvt. expand Views (all). select 2 decimal places. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. click Project Units. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units.

forming a closed loop. it is not necessary in this exercise. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated.Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. click Area Plan. or 0. you must manually add these boundary lines. 13 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). 12 When the informational dialog displays. If you select No. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). the system-computed height defaults to the level. Click OK. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. click the Room Calculations tab. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. under Views (all). click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. When you select Yes in this dialog. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. 9 Click Cancel. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 799 . You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''.

you must select one of the reference lines. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. click Area. and store area. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Next. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. rather than the area tag. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Area Plan. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. 800 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. common areas. To modify the area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Click OK.14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas.

you can either draw them or pick them. If you do not select this option. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. 23 On the Design Bar. When you add area boundary lines. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. When you pick the walls. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). the area boundary lines do not update automatically. click Area Boundary. 21 On the Options Bar. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. click Area. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 801 .Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time.

32 On the Options Bar. click Modify and select the area.25 On the Design Bar. click Area. 27 On the Options Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. Click OK. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. click . click . place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. 802 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . click Modify. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to select the area. 29 On the Design Bar. 31 On the Design Bar.

35 Add an area to the building model core. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 803 . and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and select Store Area for Area Type. enter Core for Name. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. Select Office area for Area Type. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Click OK. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps.33 In the Element Properties dialog.

37 On the File menu. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. name the project Area-in progress. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. In this exercise. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. and click Save. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. 804 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Save. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. click Color Scheme Legend. and click to place the legend. In the next exercise. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory.rvt.Notice that within the two store areas.

click the Fields tab. under Category. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 805 . 9 Click OK. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. select Area Type and click Add. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. and click OK.3 When the dialog displays. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 7 Under Available fields. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. select Areas (Rentable). click Schedule/Quantities.

806 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis .

and roofs. building elements. In this tutorial. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. If you modify a massing face.Massing 21 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. floors. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. 807 . After you make building elements. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. or both. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. you then need to update the building face. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. you can specify the view to display massing elements. curtain systems. At any time.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click Massing. under Views (all). 5 On the Design Bar. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. sweeps. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. click Training Files. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and floors. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. 808 | Chapter 21 Massing . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. You assign the default wall. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the building model uses those element types to define the walls.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. floor. and cutting geometry. click Create Mass. roofs. under Floor Plans.rvt.

and click OK. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. 18 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. under Materials and Finishes. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. under Views (all). click the Value for Material. on the Options Bar.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. 10 In the Materials dialog. click Lines. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. and click 17 On the Options Bar. and then click . 13 On the View toolbar. click Lines. on the Options Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 16 On the Sketch Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click . and click OK. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 809 . click Finish Sketch. click Extrusion Properties. 19 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown.

and click OK. click the Value for Material. 29 In the drawing area. and then click . 27 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. double-click {3D} to see the results. The second form is on top of the first form. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. and click OK. highlight the larger form. under Constraints. 30 Click to select the face. and click OK. 22 In the Materials dialog. double-click West. Continue creation of next massing form 26 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click Extrusion Properties. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. under Views (all). TIP If necessary. press TAB to highlight the entire face. 20 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Work Plane dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Pick a plane.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 25 In the Project Browser. under Materials and Finishes. 810 | Chapter 21 Massing . 21 In the Element Properties dialog.

click . click Lines. and click to select the line start point. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 811 . 33 On the Options Bar.31 On the Sketch Design Bar. Next. 34 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. and click on the Options Bar. TIP If you do not see this option. Sketch the blend base 32 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. click . click the arrow next to the drawing options. 36 On the Options Bar. 35 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 37 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line.

click Modify. 40 On the Edit toolbar. 45 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. Sketching the blend top 43 On the Design Bar. 42 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 41 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 44 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 47 On the Options Bar. 812 | Chapter 21 Massing .38 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). and delete the vertical construction line. click Lines and. click 48 Create an arc as shown. click . . click 46 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. . 39 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click Edit Top. double-click East.

53 Proceed to the next exercise. click . verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 51 On the Design Bar. In the next exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. click Blend Properties. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 813 . and click OK. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. In this exercise. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 52 On the View toolbar.49 On the Design Bar.

enter 12000 for Extrusion End. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. snap the corners to the intersections.rvt. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. as shown. click Ref Plane. 12 On the Design Bar. 2 In the drawing area. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. and 0 for Extrusion Start. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. When sketching each extrusion. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 14 Click OK. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. on the Options Bar. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. 4 On the Options bar. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 15 On the Design Bar. on the View Control Bar. double-click Level 1. m_Massing_Start. click Extrusion Properties. 814 | Chapter 21 Massing . 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. 7 Using the same technique. click Lines and. 1 In the Project Browser. click and enter 15000 for Offset. select the mass. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 13 Under Constraints. and then click Hidden Line. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. click and select Chain. click Finish Sketch. 9 On the Design Bar.

3 In the Name dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. and click Apply. you create new family types from a mass family file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 On the Mass Design Bar. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 19 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. click Finish Mass. 18 On the File menu. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it.16 On the View toolbar. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. click Save As. and 18000 mm for Depth. click Training Files. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 2 In the Family Types dialog. click .rvt. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. enter 15000 mm for Width. and click OK. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 815 . under Other. click New.rfa. Finally. 12000 mm for Height. click Family Types.

8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 816 | Chapter 21 Massing . In this exercise. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. 1 If not already selected.5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. and click Apply.rfa. click Training Files. and 6000 mm for Depth. and 9000 mm for Depth. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. You also load other existing mass families and place them. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. 18000 mm for Height. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. and click OK. 9 Click OK. 10 On the File menu. 11000 mm for Height. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. click Save As. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. and click Apply. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model.rvt.

and Triangle. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Rotate after placement. and click to place the mass. under Floor Plans. select the 3 boxes. and click OK twice. 18 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. under Views (all). 20 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass.rfa. Arc Dome. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. click Modify. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. click Modify. click Place Mass. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. 11 Select the box. 4 On the File menu. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 25 In the drawing area. 23 On the Options Bar. 12 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. and click . 6 Open the Box-Training. and click . 16 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click Place Mass. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and click OK twice. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm.rfa family files. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 817 .rfa. 3 On the View Control Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 21 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Semi Barrel Vault. select the triangle. double-click Site. 24 On the Design Bar. enter 90 for Angle. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown.rfa. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. 17 Press CTRL.2 In the Project Browser.

and click . In the next exercise. 27 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 818 | Chapter 21 Massing . and click OK twice. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. 31 Select the box and click . 34 On the View menu. click . 32 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. and click OK twice. 29 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass.26 Select the triangle. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. 33 On the View toolbar. you join these mass elements.

Joining Mass Elements | 819 . click . click 2 On the Tools toolbar. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. NOTE When you join geometry.Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place.rvt file. you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. . 4 Select the triangle. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. and then press ESC to see the result. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown.

under Floor Plans. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. on the Edit toolbar. enter SM. under Views (all). click 8 On the Options Bar. click for Axis. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. double-click Site.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 820 | Chapter 21 Massing . 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box.

Joining Mass Elements | 821 . You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. . you joined mass elements together. click . Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. 17 Press ESC to see the result. In this exercise. and then select the triangle. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first.

under Floor Plans. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. do not clear the check mark.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. and select the triangle mass element. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 2 On the Window menu. and then click OK. 822 | Chapter 21 Massing . 10 On the Options Bar. click Modify. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. select Rotate after placement. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. enter 90 degrees for Angle.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. under Views (all). Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. click . Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. clear Curved. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. 1 On the Design Bar. select Sloped (primary). click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. click Place Mass. 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Site.rvt. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. (If Design Options is already selected.

21 In the drawing area. and click Wireframe. under Views (all). 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. click Modify. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. and click . click Modify. click Place Mass. 18 In the Type Selector. Mass Elements in Design Options | 823 . 14 In the drawing area. and click OK twice. and click . select the three arc domes. 13 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View Control Bar.12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. double-click North. and click OK twice. 23 In the Project Browser. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. click . under Elevations. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

under Views (all). 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. click . 30 On the View menu. click . click the Design Options tab. and watch the status bar. select Curved. and click OK. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing.24 On the View Control Bar. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. Create a Design Option set 26 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. select Curved from the Design Option menu. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. While pressing CTRL. and click Wireframe. double-click {3D}. TIP To find the correct shapes. 824 | Chapter 21 Massing . 32 Click the value for Design Option. 29 In the Project Browser. clear Sloped. under 3D Views.

you pick massing faces to create walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you placed mass elements into Design Options.rvt. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 36 On the File menu. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise.You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. click Make Primary. you can make it the primary option. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click .rvt. select Curved and. click Training Files. 34 In the Design Options dialog. and click Close. 35 Close the warning that displays. under Option. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 825 . In this exercise.

9 On the Design Bar. click to show the massing model. double-click {3D}. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View toolbar.Brick on CMU. under Views (all). select Basic Wall: Exterior . 5 In the Type Selector.1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser. 826 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. 3 On the View menu. under Views (all). click Wall by Face. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. click Orient ➤ Southeast. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. double-click Level 3. click . Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

18 Select all the faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red.NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. click Wall by Face. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 14 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. double-click Level 1. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 11 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. double-click Level 5. 15 On the Design Bar. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 827 . 16 In the Type Selector.

20 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. double-click Level 9. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. If desired. under Views (all). you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 21 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. you pick massing faces to create floors. In this exercise.You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. and click Wireframe. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. 828 | Chapter 21 Massing . 22 Select all the faces shown in red. click . click Wall by Face.

select all levels. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View menu. 4 Click OK. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. clear Curtain Panels. Curtain Systems.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. and Walls. click Floor Area Faces. 3 On the Model Categories tab. double-click {3D}. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 829 . 6 On the Options Bar.rvt. and click OK.

and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown.8 On the Design Bar. 830 | Chapter 21 Massing . and click OK. 9 On the View menu. 12 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. click Modify. click Orient ➤ Northeast. click Floor Area Faces. select Levels 1-4. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 Press CTRL.

19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 831 . 14 On the Options Bar. click Floor Area Faces. 18 In the Project Browser.13 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK. select Level 1. double-click Level 1. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. click Modify. clear Exclude Options. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 17 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 15 Press CTRL. 16 On the Options Bar. click Floor by Face. click Create Floors. 22 On the Options Bar. 23 On the View toolbar. 21 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces.

under Schedules/Quantities. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. you pick massing faces to create roofs.24 In the Project Browser. 832 | Chapter 21 Massing . You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. In this exercise. double-click Mass Schedule. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors.

6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.400mm. under Views (all). click Create Roof. 5 On the Options Bar. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. click Roof by Face. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 833 . Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. double-click {3D}. select Basic Roof : Generic . click Create Roof. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements.

select Curtain Panels. 11 On the View menu. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. and Walls. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 9 On the Options Bar. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families.Your model should now look as shown. click Create Roof. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. click Visibility/Graphics. 834 | Chapter 21 Massing . 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. In this exercise. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. Curtain Systems. and then click OK.

5 Press CTRL. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Curtain Systems | 835 .rvt. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 3 In the Type Selector.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Curtain System by Face.

select the blended form on the in-place mass. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes. 836 | Chapter 21 Massing .

Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. In this exercise. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. click Create System. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 837 .9 On the Options Bar.

3 On the Model Categories tab.rvt. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. Next. Floors. and then click OK. click Visibility/Graphics.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Curtain Panels. Roofs. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 838 | Chapter 21 Massing . click OK. under Views (all). 2 On the View menu. Curtain Systems. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. enter 30000 for Width. under Floor Plans. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and Walls. double-click Site. click Duplicate. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. and click OK. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click .

11 On the Options Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 839 . 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. click Modify. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. clear Exclude Options. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result.10 On the Design Bar.

17 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 840 | Chapter 21 Massing . In the next steps. TIP To select the curtain wall. click Remake. double-click Level 1. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Views (all). 15 In the Project Browser. you want to select the smaller one.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. click . you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. click OK. 19 On the View toolbar. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. Also. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown.

click Remake. you will notice that Revit Architecture resized the floors.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 841 . 20 Select the roof as shown. 21 On the Options Bar.

22 Select the arc dome curtain system. In this exercise. 842 | Chapter 21 Massing . and click Remake. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. you changed the size of an existing mass family. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise.rvt. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 1 Open the 3D view. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.

8 Click None to clear the selection. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing.Massing only. click Visibility/Graphics. right-click on the 3D view. click All to select all categories.Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 843 . 9 Select Mass. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 5 On the View menu. 4 Rename the view 3D . 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 3 In the Project Browser. The 3D view now shows only the building shell.

In this exercise. This concludes the massing tutorial. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. 844 | Chapter 21 Massing . to the building shell. such as columns and an extruded roof. If desired. You might create the model shown.

place. and modify repetitive units. By grouping objects. 845 . or with those working on a different project. you not only simplify their placement.Grouping 22 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2008. all instances in the building model are updated. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. For example. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. In this tutorial. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. You can also nest groups within other groups. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. you also simplify the modification process. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications.

In this exercise. you add the new model group to a previously created group.Creating. Modifying. After you create a model group. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. You mirror one instance of the group. expand Views (all). When you make changes to a nested group. hotel rooms.rvt. In another exercise. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click First Floor. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. the host group is also updated automatically. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. expand Floor Plans. The new group is considered nested within the host group. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. click Training Files. and typical office layouts. 846 | Chapter 22 Grouping .

Creating and Placing a Group | 847 . 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. 4 On the Edit toolbar. click (Group). and click OK.2 Enter ZR. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. enter Typical Kitchen. 3 Draw a selection box around the kitchen.

848 | Chapter 22 Grouping . select the center control for the group origin.The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 7 On the Design Bar. 8 On the View toolbar. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. click Zoom To Fit. Zoom flyout. Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. click Modify.

and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. expand Model. click Modify. right-click Typical Kitchen. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. Creating and Placing a Group | 849 .Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance. under Groups. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance.

15 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror).13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. clear Copy. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 850 | Chapter 22 Grouping . The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.

18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 851 . and on the toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate).

19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 852 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Zoom flyout.

m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. as shown. one mirrored. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt.rvt. Modifying a Group | 853 . Save the dataset 22 On the File menu. When you finish editing. you make changes to an instance of a group. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. click Save As. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. and click Save. and one rotated.

press TAB. press TAB to highlight the wall.2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. 854 | Chapter 22 Grouping . (Include group member). 7 Click (Exclude group member). and click to select it. 5 Click (Exclude group member). 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click to select the door. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. NOTE To display an excluded element. select the element. and click 4 Move the cursor over the door. and click to select the wall. press TAB. 3 Click (Exclude group member).

12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. 10 In the Type Selector.127mm. select Basic Wall : Generic .8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. move the cursor to the left. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Door. 15 On the Options Bar. click Wall. Modifying a Group | 855 . select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. click Modify. clear Tag on Placement.

24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. Zoom flyout.17 On the Design Bar. move the cursor up. click Modify. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. In edit group mode. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. All other elements in the model are grayed out. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 21 On the Options Bar. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. click Zoom To Fit. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. click Edit Group. 23 In the drawing area. 856 | Chapter 22 Grouping .

under Floor Plans. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 28 For Base Offset. Nesting Groups | 857 . in the Project Browser. enter 2134. you add the Typical Kitchen group. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. which acts as the host. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. click Finish. for Unconnected Height. under Constraints.25 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Properties. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. Nesting Groups In this exercise. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary.rvt. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. 26 Select the opening. double-click First Floor. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. created in an earlier lesson. 29 In the group editor toolbar. enter 1000.

3 On the Options Bar. select the Typical Kitchen group. 4 In the group editor toolbar.2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. click (Add to Group). 5 In the drawing area. 858 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Edit Group.

and each of the bifold doors. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. 7 In the group editor toolbar. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. such as text. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group.6 Press TAB. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. such as door and window tags. Working with Detail Groups | 859 . click Finish. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. under Floor Plans. In the next exercise. double-click Second Floor. and filled regions. 8 In the Project Browser. select the wall between the folding doors. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. you add door tags to a group.

Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click First Floor. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. 860 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click to draw a rectangular region. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Filled Region. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

6 Move the cursor down and to the left. and select a point below the left elevator. 12 Enter Tile. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click to add an arc leader. 7 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 861 . click Modify. and on the Design Bar. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. click Text. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 9 On the Options Bar.

and click Create Instance. under Floor Plans. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 20 In the Project Browser. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. and click OK. as shown. and select the note and the filled region. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. 14 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Second Floor. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. click Modify. 862 | Chapter 22 Grouping . under Groups.The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. expand Detail. 16 In the drawing area. 18 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. click (Group). Add a group instance to a different drawing view 19 In the Project Browser.

click Modify 23 On the Zoom flyout. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. click Zoom To Fit. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.21 In the drawing area. click to place the detail group. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. clear Leader. Because the detail group contains variables.rvt. under Floor Plans. 22 On the Design Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups | 863 . double-click First Floor. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Tag ➤ By Category.

864 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Modify. click Check None. click (Filter Selection). as shown: 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK.4 Place door tags in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. 8 In the Filter dialog. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. select Door Tags. draw a selection box around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. click (Group). 9 On the Edit toolbar. 7 On the Options Bar.

expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Using Attached Detail Groups | 865 . and click OK.10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. and click OK. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. under Floor Plans. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. for Attached Detail Group Name. 13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. click Place Detail. therefore. double-click Second Floor. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog.

Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. browse to the Desktop. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. click Modify. 866 | Chapter 22 Grouping . This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. and click Save. and click Open. click Desktop. click OK. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.16 On the Design Bar. and click Save Group. click New ➤ Project. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. verify that Project is selected. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. under Groups\Model. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 5 In the New Project dialog. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. verify that Same as group name is selected. select 2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. for Create new.rvt. 3 For File name. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. accept the default template file.rvt. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. When you load the group from the library into a new project. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). In this case.

and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate.A warning dialog is displayed. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. When a group is converted to a link. Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. and expand Model. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. click Modify. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. click Link. Saving and Loading Groups | 867 . click Training Files. expand Groups. click Use Existing. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Create Instance. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser.rvt. and on the Options Bar.

click Bind. 868 | Chapter 22 Grouping . select the linked Revit model. expand Revit Links. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 24 In the message dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog.17 On the Design Bar. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 23 In the confirmation dialog. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. and click OK. and the link is removed. 18 In the Project Browser. click OK. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Remove Link.rvt file is added as a link to the project. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 20 On the Options Bar. click Modify. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project.

you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to add and modify site components within a project.Site 23 In this tutorial. 869 .

enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. Using the first method. click Toposurface. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. you add a building pad to the site. islands. click Training Files. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. In the second part of this exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. expand Views (all).rvt. click Point. convert the data to a table. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Site.Using Site Tools In this lesson. and then modify the data. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. You add property lines manually. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. right-click in the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a toposurface using two different methods. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This project file was created using the default metric template. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. and walkways. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. In the final exercises. and click Site. expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. 870 | Chapter 23 Site . and open Metric\m_First_Project.

The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. 8 On the Options Bar. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. Creating a Toposurface | 871 . A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour. Use the following illustration as a reference.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle.

13 In the Site Settings dialog. enter 1500 mm. 11 On the Design Bar. 15000 mm. click Site Settings. click Finish Surface. 12 On the Settings menu. and click OK. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. under Increment. under Additional Contours. 12000 mm. Use the following illustration as a reference. 872 | Chapter 23 Site . Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. and 18000 mm absolute elevations.TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points.

rename the level Base Site Elevation. rename the level Basement. under Views (all). 16 On the View toolbar. and click Shading with Edges. 15 On the View Control Bar. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. and press ENTER. click . modify the level names and elevations. Before importing the contour data. enter 1000 mm. 18 In the Project Browser. Creating a Toposurface | 873 . click the elevation value. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. and press ENTER. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. 21 Click the Level 2 text. click Yes. 14 On the View toolbar.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click Model Graphics Style. and double-click South. 19 On the Design Bar. on the Standard toolbar. and press ENTER. click to delete it. click Modify. 23 Click the Level 1 text. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

Under Layer/Level Colors. 31 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 29 Select the imported topography. Click Open. 28 On the Design Bar. click Pin Position. click Modify. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. Under Import or Link. and click OK. under Floor Plans. select Preserve colors. 30 On the Edit menu. double-click Site. clear Current view only and choose Select for Layers. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 25 On the File menu. click Modify. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. Until it is exploded. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder.24 In the Project Browser. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 874 | Chapter 23 Site . it is considered an import symbol. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Training Files.

clear C_INDX. 36 On the Design Bar. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. click the Annotation Categories tab. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. 34 Under Visibility. and then click OK. 32 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. When you select the import symbol. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. select it. Creating a Toposurface | 875 . clear Elevations.Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. and click OK. when the edges highlight. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. click Toposurface.

Using the first method. 876 | Chapter 23 Site . 43 On the File menu. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. Adding Property Lines In this exercise.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 42 On the View toolbar. 39 On the Design Bar. click Finish Surface. this project file is required in its current state. 40 On the View toolbar. click . name the project Site-in progress. and click Save. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.rvt. “Adding Property Lines” on page 876. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. you add property lines using two methods. click Save As. Using the second method. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.

This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Select and delete the right vertical line. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. 4 On the Design Bar. Adding Property Lines | 877 . 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. select Create property lines by sketching. click Lines. and click OK.rvt. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Using the 3-point Arc tool. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. add an arc line on the right. Click Modify. double-click Site. On the Design Bar. Site-in progress. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Property Line. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. do so before continuing. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Lines. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog.

8 On the Options Bar. 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E 878 | Chapter 23 Site . click Property Line. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch.6 On the Design Bar. click 12 On the Design Bar. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. click Finish Sketch. click OK. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ to delete them. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. 14 In the Property Lines dialog. select the lines. 9 In the warning dialog. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. click OK. select Edit Table. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. A warning dialog is displayed. when they highlight. 15 Starting in Row #1. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. on the Standard toolbar. and click OK. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography.

click Visibility/Graphics. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. and click OK. 20 Click Load. click the Imported Categories tab. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. Before adding property line segment tags. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 16 Click OK. Adding Property Lines | 879 . click to place the property lines. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. click Training Files. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments.dwg and click OK. 23 On the View menu. 19 In the Tags dialog.Notice that after you complete the last line. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor.rfa. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. If the gap is not closed. 25 Under Visibility. 22 In the Tags dialog. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. This means there is no gap in the property lines.

you loaded and tagged the property line segments. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. click Model Graphics Style. and click Drafting.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Shading with Edges. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. In the next exercise. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. In this exercise. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. this project file is required in its current state. 30 On the View Control Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. click Tag ➤ By Category. 31 On the File menu. “Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings” on page 880. you created two sets of property lines. clear Leader. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. In the final step. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. click to place it. The tags display more prominently in this view. 880 | Chapter 23 Site . you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 27 On the Options Bar. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor.

0 mm. select Single Value. click Object Styles. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. Under Line Color. and click Wireframe. click Model Graphics Style. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. 2 On the Settings menu. enter 1000. under Contour Line Display. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 881 .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1.rvt. enter the name Working Contour. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. select a shade of Brown. and click OK. Site-in progress. for Subcategory. Under Line Pattern. Under Subcategory. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. select Working Contour. select Topography. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. Under Range Type. In the Object Styles dialog. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. click New. 7 Click OK. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. click Site Settings. 10 Under Additional Contours. select Dash dot.

displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. In the next exercise. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties.11 Click OK. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. The object style subcategory. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. parking areas. The next exercise requires a new dataset. and islands. such as material. parking areas. you create topographic subregions to define roads. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. click Close. In this exercise. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. you create subregions in order to define roads. “Creating Topographic Subregions” on page 882. 882 | Chapter 23 Site . 12 On the File menu. Working Contour. and islands. 13 Proceed to the next exercise.

and open Metric\m_Site. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. Creating Topographic Subregions | 883 . click Lines. click Training Files.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.rvt. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. click Subregion. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. Although the exact dimensions are not important. try to replicate the location and proportion. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide.

884 | Chapter 23 Site . Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. and click OK. select Site .NOTE In the Metric dataset. 9 On the View menu. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.Tarmacadam for Name. click Properties. When you finish the sketch in a later step. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. 6 In the Materials dialog. click the Value for Material. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. click Shading with Edges. under Materials and Finishes. 8 On the Design Bar. enter Parking for Name. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

double-click Site.Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . under Schedules/Quantities. click Edit Boundary. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. 12 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Project Browser. they display within this schedule. and click Hidden Line. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. and double-click Topography Schedule. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. Delete overlapping lines. click Finish Sketch. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. As you create new subregions. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each.Tarmacadam. double-click Topography Schedule. click Model Graphics Style. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. Notice that the project area has increased. 17 On the View Control Bar. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. Creating Topographic Subregions | 885 . 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. click Model Graphics Style. and click Shading with Edges.

under Schedules/Quantities. click Model Graphics Style. 24 On the Design Bar. enter Island . 28 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. Within each subregion. click Lines.Grass for Name. under Floor Plans. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. and click OK. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Materials dialog. click Subregion. select Site . click Finish Sketch. and click OK.Grass for Name. double-click Topography Schedule. click the Value for Material. 23 In the upper-right parking area. under Identity Data. 30 In the Project Browser. 886 | Chapter 23 Site . 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Site. and click Hidden Line. 22 On the Design Bar. 29 On the View Control Bar.Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. and click Shading with Edges. click Properties. 20 On the View Control Bar. In this training project.

walkway. under Floor Plans.31 In the Project Browser. click Subregion. You must sketch each region separately. double-click Site. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. 32 In the Project Browser. Creating Topographic Subregions | 887 . and apply the material Concrete . double-click Topography Schedule. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. under Schedules/Quantities. Name each region Island . 35 On the Design Bar. 34 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and apply the material Site . click Lines. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser.Cast-in-Situ Concrete .Grass. double-click Site. Name the subregion Walkway.Grass. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. click Finish Sketch. click Save As. 39 On the File menu. under Schedules/Quantities. 38 In the Project Browser. Notice that the schedule has been updated. 37 On the Design Bar. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. 888 | Chapter 23 Site .WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. there is still only one toposurface. double-click Topography Schedule.

and click Save. click . under Floor Plans. “Using Phasing” on page 992. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Grading the Toposurface | 889 . Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select the toposurface. see the tutorial. When you use the grading tool. select Existing for Phase Created. “Grading the Toposurface” on page 889. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. double-click Site. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. and click OK. Site tutorial-in progress. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. 5 On the Design Bar. under Phasing.40 Navigate to your preferred folder. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. RELATED For more information regarding phasing.rvt. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 3 On the Options Bar. click Modify. A warning dialog is displayed. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise.rvt.

and click Select and Edit.6 On the Design Bar. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. select Copy Internal Points. 890 | Chapter 23 Site . Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 8 Select the topographic surface. click Graded Region.

12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. Grading the Toposurface | 891 . click Model Graphics Style.10 Press DELETE. 11 On the View Control Bar. 13 Press DELETE. and click Hidden Line. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. demolished. and new.

click . 15 On the Options Bar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 19 On the View Control Bar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat.Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 892 | Chapter 23 Site . 20 On the View toolbar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. click . click Model Graphics Style. 18 On the View toolbar. click Finish Surface. and click Shading with Edges. click Point. 17 On the Design Bar.

you create a building pad. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. “Adding a Building Pad” on page 893. When you add a building pad. under Phasing. and click OK. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise.rvt. Only the graded topography displays. and delete it. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. 26 On the File menu. 24 On the View menu. Adding a Building Pad | 893 . click View Properties. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. 23 Select the toposurface. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. and click OK. only the original toposurface displays. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click View Properties. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Therefore. specify New Construction for Phase. specify Existing for Phase. click Save. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. under Phasing. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. you can delete it. Site tutorial-in progress.The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface.

the Pick Walls command is active. NOTE By default. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. click Lines. and click Hidden Line. 4 On the Design Bar. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. double-click Site. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Pad. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 894 | Chapter 23 Site . 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. If you have an existing building model. click Model Graphics Style.Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser.

click 9 On the View toolbar. click building pad. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice the new 10 On the File menu. click Model Graphics Style. 7 On the View Control Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. . Adding Site Components | 895 . and click Shading with Edges. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. “Adding Site Components” on page 895. 8 On the View toolbar.6 On the Design Bar. Adding Site Components In this exercise. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. click Save. click Finish Sketch. this project file is required in its current state. .

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 3 In the Type Selector. double-click Site. click Modify. click Parking Component. 5 On the Design Bar. Site tutorial-in progress. 896 | Chapter 23 Site .rvt. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser.90 deg. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . and select the parking space. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. under Floor Plans.

Notice the new Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. click 9 On the View toolbar. click Site Component. . .7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. click parking spaces. under Floor Plans. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. double-click Site. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Adding Site Components | 897 . Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space.

choose any tree type. 898 | Chapter 23 Site . click .12 In the Type Selector. 14 On the View toolbar. 13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. double-click Site. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.rvt. this project file is required in its current state. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 899 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. click . “Tagging Site and Parking Components” on page 899. under Floor Plans.15 On the View toolbar. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged. In the following illustration. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. 16 On the File menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. Site tutorial-in progress.

In the following exercise. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Mark.rvt. and click OK. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. “Creating Parking Space Schedules” on page 900. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. 900 | Chapter 23 Site . click Apply. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. Site tutorial-in progress. click Save. and click OK. and click Add. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 On the File menu. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. 5 On the View menu. select Parking for Category. you create a parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. this project file is required in its current state. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. and click Apply. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 4 Under Available fields. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value.3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Hidden Line.

5 Under Available fields. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. 14 In the Parking Schedule. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 6 Click the Formatting tab. double-click Site. select Mark. 7 Under Fields. select Type. 10 In the Project Browser. number the first three spaces consecutively. click Close Hidden Windows. click Save. under Space. enter Space. 13 In the Parking Schedule. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 11 On the Window menu. 8 Under Fields. If necessary. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 901 . and under Heading. 12 In the Site plan. under Space. finish numbering the remaining spaces. 9 On the Window menu. click Tile. The parking schedule is displayed. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 15 On the File menu. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. and under Heading. select Type. and click OK. enter Size. and click Add.

902 | Chapter 23 Site .

In the final lesson. and beams to Level 1. You begin by adding the structural walls. columns. 903 . you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model.Structural 24 In this tutorial. you use the structural tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to create a building model skeleton. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. After completing level 1.

you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. click Training Files.rvt.dwg. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. If necessary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. 4 In the Import/Link dialog. go to the Project Browser. 904 | Chapter 24 Structural . You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. under Floor Plans. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. and open Metric\m_Structural. under Import or Link. and double-click Level 2. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. 2 On the File menu.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. click Training Files. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. and select Metric\m_Wall_Import. under Views (all). specify the following: ■ Select Link (instead of import).

In this exercise. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. 8 On the File menu. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. After you trace the walls. select Automatically place. 6 Under Positioning. Sketching Structural Walls | 905 . you imported a DWG file. This file is used in the next exercise. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the structural tab is not displayed. Select All for Layers. “Sketching Structural Walls” on page 905. right-click in the Design Bar and click Structural. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model.rvt. to trace the initial set of structural walls. Structural_tutorial. click Save As. 7 Click Open. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. select Invert colors. and select Origin to origin.■ ■ Select Current view only.

8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. In the steps that follow. specify the following: ■ Select Depth. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. 906 | Chapter 24 Structural . select Basic Wall: Generic . 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.200mm. In addition. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. you add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. 6 On the Options Bar. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. First. Click . click Structural Wall. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. rather than the height. and click to specify the wall endpoint.Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 5 In the Type Selector.

12 On the Design Bar. click Modify to finish the sketch. 11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. 13 On the View toolbar. 10 Move the curser to the right. Sketching Structural Walls | 907 . and click the next line intersection. click . and click to complete the chain of walls.9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection.

On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. click Structural Wall.TIP If necessary. in the View toolbar. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking View tools to modify the 3D view. and double-click Level 2. Use the Dynamic 14 In the Project Browser. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ 908 | Chapter 24 Structural . 17 Using the bulleted steps below. expand Floor Plans.

25 In the Type Selector. click Modify to end the wall chain.dwg and click OK. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 19 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 2. select Basic Wall: Generic . 26 On the Options Bar. ■ Sketching Structural Walls | 909 . click the Imported Categories tab. Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser. 21 On the View menu. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. under Floor Plans.18 On the Design Bar. click Structural Wall. click . specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. clear m_Wall_Import. click Visibility/Graphics. Click to create a three-point arc.200mm. 23 Under Visibility.

This is the left extent of the arc.27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. click . 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. 28 On the Options Bar. This is the right extent of the arc. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. 29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. 910 | Chapter 24 Structural . Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall.

and press ENTER. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. click Modify. Sketching Structural Walls | 911 . click the value. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. 34 Select the horizontal wall. and press Enter. If it is not. enter 1500. enter 1500.32 On the Design Bar.

In the steps that follow. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. 36 On the Design Bar. 38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown.35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. 912 | Chapter 24 Structural . Both walls are 1200 mm long. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint and wall centerline shown in the illustration below. clear Chain. you create the final structural walls for the project.

you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. click Save. You then make minor modifications to their position. under Views (all).39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. Floor Plans. click . that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 41 On the View toolbar. “Dimensioning and Modifying Walls” on page 913. This project file is required. 40 On the Design Bar. Structural_tutorial. double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. In this exercise. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. In the next exercise. click Modify. 42 On the File menu. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. in its current state.rvt. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 913 .

click Dimension. click Options to specify the wall pick options. select Intersecting Walls. 6 Move the cursor to the left. the Options button becomes available. and click OK. 4 On the Options Bar. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. and when it highlights. click Modify. 914 | Chapter 24 Structural . and click to place the dimension as shown. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select .3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select Entire Walls for Pick. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select it. After you select Entire Walls.

9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal. Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown.8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 915 .

and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. In the next lesson. you add structural columns. click Undo Edit Dimension Length. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. 12 On the Edit menu. 916 | Chapter 24 Structural . to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. several different beam types.11 Click the temporary dimension value. 13 On the File menu. Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. click Save. joists. In this exercise. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. in its current state. This project file is required. “Adding Structural Columns and Beams” on page 916. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B.

press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. In addition. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. If necessary. zoom in to place the column. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. Structural_tutorial. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. click Structural Column. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. select Height and specify Level 2.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. and you add a column outside the grids. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. 2 On the View menu. Adding Structural Columns | 917 . TIP When adding the column.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. you use the grid intersection tool. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.

and A. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. C3. and select grids 1-5. click Grid Intersection. and C5. 9 Use a crossing selection. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. 918 | Chapter 24 Structural .7 Add similar columns to C2.

and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. Columns A3-5 are shown below. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A.TIP To create the crossing selection. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. 10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. Adding Structural Columns | 919 .

click Finish. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. click Grid Intersection. This completes this set of columns. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. click Finish.14 If necessary. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. 20 On the Design Bar. click Structural Column. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. 19 On the Options Bar. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. click Modify. Columns B3-5 are shown below. 920 | Chapter 24 Structural . press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. zoom out until you can see all the grids. 15 On the Options Bar. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5.

As you use the beam tool. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. In the next exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.24 On the Design Bar. you learn how to work with these varied conditions. 26 On the File menu. you add structural beams to the building model. 25 On the View toolbar. “Adding Structural Beams and Girders” on page 921. This project file is required. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. In this exercise. you add beams manually. click Save. click Modify. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 921 . you used various methods to add structural columns. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. click . in its current state.

7 On the Design Bar. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. Structural_tutorial. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Beam. 2 On the View menu. Start the beam at the column midpoint and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall centerline. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. double-click Level 2. 922 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Modify.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. under Floor Plans.

click Grid.7. Use the following table for other conditions. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. 10 In the Type Selector. Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 923 . if a beam is joined column-to-column. 11 On the Options Bar. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. Column Brace Horizontal Bracing Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. 14 On the Options Bar. and then move the cursor up to grid A. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67.9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. select Girder for Usage. When you use the grid tool to place beams. For example.

19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. click Finish. and press ENTER.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. enter 8200. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. 22 In the Type Selector. click the temporary dimension value. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. and select grid C. click Beam. 17 On the Options Bar. press and hold CTRL. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 924 | Chapter 24 Structural . 18 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. click Grid. 24 Select grid 3.

and for Usage. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. click Finish. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 925 . Click column B5 to add the first beam. 25 On the Options Bar. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. In addition. select Girder. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. select Chain. Press ESC to end the chain.Notice beams are added between columns.

You can also use the shortcut key. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. Press ESC to end the chain. 30 On the Options Bar. connecting the column at B4. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. select Girder for Usage. to snap only to intersections. 29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 926 | Chapter 24 Structural . NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. Press ESC to end the chain. SI. select Girder for Usage.28 On the Options Bar.

Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. click Grid. If the W310x32. 33 Select grid A. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. 34 On the Options Bar. The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. 36 On the Options Bar. click Grid.7 beam had crossed grid A. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 927 . 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. click Finish.

42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 39 On the View toolbar. 45 Specify the beam start point at the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. 38 On the Options Bar. 44 On the Options Bar. click . select Girder for Usage. 928 | Chapter 24 Structural . under Floor Plans. In the steps that follow. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm.37 Select grid B. double-click Level 2. Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grid 4 and 5. 43 In the Type Selector. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. click Finish. click Beam.

and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. click .46 Move the cursor to the right. click Modify. 48 On the View toolbar. 47 On the Design Bar. Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 929 .

and select Chain. 53 On the Options Bar. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall and grid 3. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. and click when it intersects grid 2. select Girder. 52 In the Type Selector. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. 930 | Chapter 24 Structural . 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans.Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser. In the steps that follow. for Usage. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region.

and click when it intersects grid 1. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 931 . 57 On the View toolbar. Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode.56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. click .

you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. double-click Level 2. 5 On the Options Bar. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions.7. you add joists and purlins to the building model. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser.B3 quadrants. In the next exercise. For example. You then create a joist array. in its current state. Structural_tutorial. 4 In the Type Selector.58 On the File menu. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. under Floor Plans. select Automatic. you add joists and purlins to the building model. This project file is required. click Beam. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid one. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 932 | Chapter 24 Structural . 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. click Save. 2 Zoom around the A1 . for Usage. 6 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. “Adding Joists and Purlins ” on page 932.

click Modify. you selected the Automatic option. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. Adding Joists and Purlins | 933 . notice that the Structural Usage value is Joist. 11 Click OK.7 On the Design Bar. on the Edit menu. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. 8 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. under Structural. Create a joist array 12 With the joist selected. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Array. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. 9 With the beam selected. According to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. click on the Options Bar.

14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. Enter 14 for Number. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. enter 1250 and press ENTER. Select 2nd for Move to. specify the following: Click . This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. Once the direction is set.13 On the Options Bar. 934 | Chapter 24 Structural . ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.

17 Add a beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. click Beam. 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin. Adding Joists and Purlins | 935 .Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown to specify the array start point. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. specify the following: Click . 21 On the Options Bar. Select 2nd for Move to. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. 20 On the Edit menu. click Array. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage parameter value.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. style. Enter 7 for Number. and purlins. 936 | Chapter 24 Structural . and click. joists. and color within the Object Styles dialog.

clear all options except Structural Framing (Girder) and Structural Framing (Joist). 26 In the Filter dialog. Adding Joists and Purlins | 937 .The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. 25 On the Options Bar. change the following instance parameters: ■ Select Moment Connection Last. click . and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. 27 On the Options Bar. click . Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. and click OK.

Click OK. click . in its current state. 31 On the File menu. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. In the next lesson.■ ■ Select Moment Connection First. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. and notice the connection symbols display. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. “Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels” on page 938. 938 | Chapter 24 Structural . This project file is required. 29 On the Design Bar. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. 30 On the View toolbar. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. click Save. In this exercise. click Modify. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. you create new levels.

Click to add Level 3. 2 Select grid 1. click Level. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Elevations. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. You need at least 3 meters of space. Defining New Levels | 939 . Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. double-click Building Elevation. 5 On the Options Bar.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. you create several new levels.Defining New Levels In this exercise. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. Structural_tutorial. select Make Plan View.

you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. 8 On the File menu. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. These levels that are required in the next exercise. you created three new levels. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Structural_tutorial. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. click Save. This project file is required. In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar. 940 | Chapter 24 Structural . click . “Duplicating the Existing Design” on page 940.In the Project Browser. in its current state.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Each level is 3000 mm high.

click OK.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. in its current state. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. 6 In the Select Levels dialog. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Edit menu. “Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation” on page 942. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 8 On the File menu. In this exercise. under Elevations. Duplicating the Existing Design | 941 . to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 3 On the Edit menu. press and hold CTRL. select Level 3. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. Make sure the entire building model is included. click Copy to Clipboard. 7 In the Project Browser. In the next lesson. you copied the existing structural elements on Level 1 and used the paste-align command to create the structural framing on the upper levels. 5 In the Select Levels dialog. This project file is required. double-click Building Elevation. and select Levels 4 and 5. click Save.

Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor over grid C. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. in the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. make sure Attach to Grid is selected. click Modify. 942 | Chapter 24 Structural . Structural_tutorial. double-click Level 2. you create a framing elevation. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. 2 Zoom out so you can see the entire building model. 4 On the Options Bar. and click. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. Elevation 1-a. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. You can now view the new elevation. click Framing Elevation. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces.

click Save. Adding Structural Braces | 943 . 8 On the File menu.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. “Adding Structural Braces” on page 943. you add c-channel bracing to the building model.7 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. You are ready to add the structural braces. in its current state. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. Notice the stick framing representation. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. you add structural braces to the building model. In the next exercise. In this exercise. This project file is required. Structural_tutorial.

select the view crop box. selectM_ C-Channel: C75x7. you use point-to-point insertion.4.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and using the shape grips. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. 944 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Brace. 3 In the Type Selector. When adding the braces. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint below the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. Also select grids 2 and 3 and drag them until they appear as shown.

The second brace is displayed. Adding Structural Braces | 945 . 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. 7 Enter SE and click the endpoint below the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4.The brace displays.

Select 2nd for Move to. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. specify the following: Click . 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Array. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint.Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click Tag All Not Tagged. 11 On the Options Bar. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. 10 On the Edit menu. Enter 4 for Number. 946 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Modify. Select Constrain. 9 Select both braces on Level 4.

16 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Braces | 947 . you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. select Structural Framing Tags. In this exercise. and click OK. click Save. click .15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 17 On the File menu.

948 | Chapter 24 Structural .

This prevents possible conflicts within the project. they cannot make changes to it. You can enable Worksharing for any project. stairs. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. called Worksharing. A workset is a collection of building elements. doors. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. 949 . and so on. Using Worksharing. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. however. All other team members can view this workset. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2008. such as walls.Sharing Projects 25 When working with large building projects. floors. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. In this tutorial. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose.

You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. After the project is shared. When setting up Worksharing. To make a workset editable. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. use Element Borrowing. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. and click Editable. you specify an active workset. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. such as annotations and dimensions. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. The first time you activate worksets within a project. In the next exercise. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. When you are working on a shared project. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you can select which worksets are open or closed. Working in a shared project In a shared project. After learning the fundamentals. Project size 950 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you must first enable Worksharing. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. Elements specific to a view. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. go to the Worksets dialog. select the desired workset.

you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. and View worksets. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Shared Levels and Grids. each team member has control over a portion of the design. On this tab. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. for a typical project. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 951 . Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. When creating the new worksets. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage.The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Team member roles Typically. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. with each assigned a specific functional task. Regardless of the default setting. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. such as a tenant interior. When you create a new workset. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. designers work in teams. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. As new members create worksets for their own use. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Experience has shown that. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. not including the Project Standards. Instead. You should have at least one workset for each person. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. In most projects. In a multi-story structure. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. you control workset visibility on a per view basis.

you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. When you save locally (to your local file). you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. For example. When finished or at regular intervals. After saving to the central file. When you save to the central file. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. When you save to the central file. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. you have the option to choose which worksets to open.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. your changes are saved. proceeds as usual. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. On the Options Bar. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. However. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. 952 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Therefore. As you work. Generally. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. if a workset named Interior was created. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. your changes propagate to the entire team. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. the file is saved as the central file. however. within the local file. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. you should then save to your local file. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. you can select which workset is active. This makes them available to other team members. you make that workset editable by you. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. This is called “Selective Open.

you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. click Training Files. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. for instance. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence.rvt. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. reload the latest changes from the central file. and then save the local file. In this conceptual exercise. and open Common\c_Worksets. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File." Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. Alternatively. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. make any required worksets editable. using VPN. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will not only lose the changes to that workset.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. To do this. In the next exercise. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. save to the central file. When working remotely. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. In this instance. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. if you know who checked out the required workset. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. In this situation. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. and make that workset editable. you should check out the Materials workset. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 953 . you work no differently then you would in the office. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise.

Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. In this case. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. The Worksets dialog is displayed. For example. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. Only User-Created worksets should display. and notice all are editable by you. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. Therefore. 4 In the Worksets dialog. click Worksets. and Views. ■ 6 Under Show. another is assigned the interior layout. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset name. For training purposes. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. When you enable worksharing. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. 3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. In this simple training project. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. under Show. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Project Standards. 954 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. clear Families. imagine four users including yourself. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. Your username displays as the present owner. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names.

The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. 12 In the Worksets dialog. and click OK. 13 Click Rename. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. click . Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. 20 Click OK. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. 14 In the Rename dialog.Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog. 15 In the Worksets dialog. and click OK. 17 In the drawing area. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Because the interior walls appear in many views. 10 Click New. currently named Workset1. 21 Select one of the interior walls. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. You do. click OK. click New. and walls. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. 24 Select all of the interior elements. 9 Click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click . In this training file. When you initially activate Worksharing. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. however. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 955 . expand Views (all). furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. under Identity Data. and double-click Level 1. it is better to make them visible by default. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. under Identity Data. 18 On the Options Bar. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. you can rename the default workset. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. clear Visible by default in all views. stairs. select Workset1. 22 On the Options Bar. type the name Exterior Shell. select Interior Layout for Workset. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. including the interior doors. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model.

The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible.The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 27 On the View menu. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Worksets tab. If any interior elements remain. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 25 On the Options Bar. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 30 Click OK. 956 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . click the Worksets tab. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 31 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click . under Identity Data. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. click Visibility/Graphics.

Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. In addition. click . make modifications to the building model. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. and click OK. 3 Click Open. 36 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 39 In the Save As dialog. 34 In the Project Browser.33 Select Interior Layout. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 In the Open dialog. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. under Identity Data. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. click Open. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. check out worksets. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. Working Individually with Worksets | 957 . 35 In the drawing area. Now that you have created the central file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. double-click Level 2. make sure you remember the location of this central file. select the central file and. select all of the interior elements of the building model. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. you enabled Worksharing on a project. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. you create your local file. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 42 In the Worksets dialog. click Save As. 45 On the File menu. click Non Editable. click Worksets. select Interior Layout for Workset. click Close. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. In this exercise. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. select Specify. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. under Open Worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. “Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets” on page 953. under Views (all). This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 43 On the right side of the dialog. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. please do so before continuing. If you have not yet completed the exercise. 40 Click Save. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. 44 Click OK.

On the Options Bar. 6 In the Save As dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 5 On the File menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. Next. and click Save. select Interior Layout for Name. expand Views (all). 14 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. If this is selected. 10 In the Worksets dialog. and double-click Level 1. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. click Modify. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. 17 On the Options Bar. Verify that it is cleared. notice the Editable Only option. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. click Options.4 In the Opening Worksets dialog. and click OK. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. select Interior Layout. 11 Click OK. click . select all the User-Created worksets. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. and click OK. 958 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. and select Yes for Editable. 12 On the Window menu. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. click Worksets. 7 In the File Save Options dialog. click Save As. In this case. Before working on the model. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable.

notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. Because this element is not owned by another user. and click OK. Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 25 Delete the door. In the Worksets dialog. click .126mm Partition (2-hr). The precise location is not important. you can still edit this wall. If it was owned by another user. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. select Basic Wall: Interior . 28 In the Type Selector. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 23 Click OK. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. Working Individually with Worksets | 959 . The upper exterior wall should still be selected. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. In this case. 20 On the Options Bar. click Wall. under Identity Data. 22 On the File menu. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank.18 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. 21 Click OK. however. click Worksets. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. 19 Under Constraints.

select: ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets 960 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . and save locally immediately afterward. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. 36 In the Save to Central dialog. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. Borrowed Elements is selected. save to central. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. In addition. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. 33 In the Type Selector. you should relinquish all worksets. which matches the information in the Status Bar. Whenever you save. The Save to Central dialog is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. click Door. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. At the end of a work session. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. In this particular case. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. click Modify. When working in your local file. it is recommended. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. displays the workset as well as the element type. click Save to Central. a tooltip. 34 Using the following illustration as a guide. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. you should perform regular saves. add two door openings into the rooms you created.30 On the Design Bar. By default.

consider that person to be User 1. You modified the building model. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and click OK. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. and click OK. User 2: Create a local file. under Username. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and reset the Username to your computer login name. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). two users access the central file through a network connection. skip the following section. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2.■ Save the local file after “Save to Central” 37 Click OK. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. In this exercise. and reload the latest changes. each user must check out worksets. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. In the following section of this exercise. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. enter User 2. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. This is a system setting. you created your local file. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. 3 On the Settings menu. return to the Settings dialog. click Open. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. and proceed to Creating a local copy. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. For training purposes. 8 Click Open. specifically sequenced. If you have not yet completed these exercises. checked out worksets. 7 In the Open dialog. In addition. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. please do so before continuing. under Open Worksets. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 961 . For training purposes. select all the User-Created worksets. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. instructions are staggered. one user has already created a local file. 4 Click the General Tab and. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Options. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. make elements editable. Throughout the process. select the central file and. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. leave this file open in its current state. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this.rvt. select Specify. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu.

open it now. click Worksets.10 On the File menu. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. User 1: Check out worksets. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. it becomes the active workset. 18 On the File menu.” 28 Click OK. 11 In the Save As dialog. 16 Click OK. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. This file is for your use only. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. expand Views (all). click Options. and click OK. If you only have one workset checked out. You now have a local copy of the project. modify the building model. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. expand Views (all). You are now the owner of that workset. If it is not open. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. click Worksets. expand Floor Plans. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. click Save As. 14 On the File menu. click Save to Central. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. and double-click Level 1. 22 Click OK. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. and click Save. 962 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. expand Floor Plans. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. and select Yes for Editable. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. 23 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. and select Yes for Editable. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 26 On the File menu.

select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Before adding any furniture. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. right-click Level 1. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. under Floor Plans. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 36 On the File menu. click Save to Central. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. under Floor Plans. click Component. click Save to Central.” 34 Click OK. Click Yes. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. and click OK. When you save to central. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 45 On the Project Browser. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 963 . Because you now have more than one workset checked out. The changes User 2 made are apparent. select Yes for Editable. A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. However. select the lower exterior wall. 41 Select Furniture Layout. and click Rename. you should create a furniture plan view. click Reload Latest. 33 In the Save to Central dialog. under Views (all). 32 On the File menu. and click Duplicate. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. User 1: Reload latest worksets. under Floor Plans. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. click Worksets. 44 In the Rename View dialog. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 42 On the Project Browser. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide.” 38 Click OK. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall.30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 43 On the Project Browser. 40 On the File menu.

66 In the Save to Central dialog. 61 On the File menu. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” 67 Click OK. click Save to Central. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. click Save to Central. click Modify. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. such as Wall Types. choose any desk. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. click Reload Latest. 58 In the Type Properties dialog. 60 Click OK 3 times. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 49 On the View menu. 48 On the Design Bar. NOTE System families. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. and click OK.” 54 Click OK. select Project Standards. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. and click Properties. under Show. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 53 In the Save to Central dialog. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. enter Exterior Wall . 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 62 In the Worksets dialog. and click OK. rather than Families. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view.200mm. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. 65 On the File menu. 964 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . leave this file open in its current state. and click inside any room. Therefore. click Edit/New. click Worksets. the Visible by default option was not selected. click Visibility/Graphics. 52 On the File menu. click the Worksets tab. 64 Click OK. are placed under Project Standards. 57 In the Element Properties dialog. click Rename. 59 In the Rename dialog.47 In the Type Selector.

and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. In the final exercise of this tutorial. This exercise requires two users and. Checking out worksets. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. 3 In the Save As dialog. click Save As. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. and these problems are rectified. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” In this exercise. 70 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. There are specific instructions for each user. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. 4 In the File Save Options dialog. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. select the following. you need to set up your central and local files. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. throughout this training. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. finished the previous workset exercises. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Each user must have network access to the central file. modified the building model. you save the dataset as a central file. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. As each of you work. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. leave this file open in its current state. “Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users” on page 965. Each user checked out worksets. In subsequent steps. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. and click OK. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). 69 On the File menu. and still have your local files open. and save 68 On the File menu.User 1: Reload latest. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 965 . click Options. click Training Files. At the appropriate point in this exercise. and published their changes back to the central file. select Make this a Central File after save.rvt. 5 Click Save. select Reload Latest. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. select Save to Central.

15 Click Open. click Save As. 18 In the Save As dialog. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. select the central file and under Open Worksets. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 14 In the Open dialog. On the Settings menu. The central file should still be open. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. click Options. and click OK. Afterwards. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK. click Options. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. In addition. 966 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. return to the Settings dialog. select them. This is the local file for User 1. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. click Options. Next. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. click Open. click Save As. and click Save. select Specify. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. 7 On the File menu. and click OK. 13 On the File menu. and click Save. if any User-Created worksets are not open. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. and click Open. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 23 In the Worksets dialog. 17 On the File menu. This is a system setting. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 10 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. Set the Username to User 2. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. click Worksets. Click the General tab of the Options dialog.User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. 9 In the Save As dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only.

Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. and click Editing Requests. under Floor Plans. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. click the File menu. 30 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. and select Yes for Editable. After you submit the request. 27 In the Worksets dialog. and then click OK. 25 Under Active Workset. verify that Editable Only is cleared. select Interior Layout. select the second window from the top. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. You are now the owner of that workset. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. You are now the owner of that workset. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 31 On the left exterior wall. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. double-click Level 1. select the Interior Layout workset. 28 Under Active Workset. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 967 . and select Yes for Editable. At this point.24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. click Workse